00900486-01 OM WORKS Material Manager V2.20 R22-1 EN

WORKS Material Manager
V2.20
Operating Manual
11/2022 EN
ASMPT GmbH & Co. KG
Rupert-Mayer-Straße 44 | 81379 Munich | Germany
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of ASMPT. Other trademarks depicted in this publication may be trademarks whose
unauthorised use by third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner.
The instructions (“Instructions”) provided to the user (“User”) herein are intended to enable the User to make use of the product (“Product”) in
relation to, or interactive with, certain third-party equipment (“3/P Equipment”). Though ASMPT has offered the Instructions to User in good faith,
and believes the information contained in the Instructions to be reasonably accurate, ASMPT expressly advises and warns the User that the
Instructions may contain inaccuracies and may be changed or updated without notice, and that some or all of the Instructions may be potentially
inadequate or lacking in essential detail.
ASMPT further expressly advises User and declares that:

(a) all Instructions are and shall remain the exclusive property of ASMPT, and are and shall be provided by ASMPT "as is," with all faults, without
warranty of any kind, and ASMPT hereby expressly disclaims all warranties and conditions with regard to any use of the Product in relation to, or
interactive with, any 3/P Equipment, or any part thereof or appurtenance thereto, and any Instructions related thereto, including all implied
warranties and conditions of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and workmanlike effort; and
(b) the use of the Product in relation to, or interactive with, any 3/P Equipment (“Use of the Product”), or use or reliance on any information
presented in any Instructions concerning the use of the Product, is in each case at user’s sole risk.
User hereby releases ASMPT from any present or future liability arising out of the Use of the Product. User further covenants not to bring, and to
hold ASMPT harmless from, any legal action of any kind against ASMPT relating to the Use of the Product by User or any other person who gains
access to the Product engaged in such use by or through User.
In no event shall ASMPT be liable for any direct, indirect, punitive, incidental, special, or consequential damages or damages for loss of profits,
revenue, or use, arising out of or in any way connected with the instructions or the Use of the Product, whether based on contract, tort,
negligence, strict liability or otherwise.
Copyright © ASMPT Technical data subject to change
Item No.: 00900486-01 Printed by ASMPT

Contents
Contents
Contents 3
1 Preface 10
1.1 Brief outline 10
1.2 Requirements 12
1.3 Signs and symbols used 12
1.4 Differences in the user interface display 12
1.5 Online help 13
1.6 Overview of editions 14
1.7 ASMPT SMT solutions on the World Wide Web 17
2 Workflows 19
2.1 Plant Layout 19
2.1.1 Creating a Factory Layout 21
2.1.2 Editing the properties of the Factory Layout 22
2.1.2.1 Naming conventions for storage units 24
2.1.2.2 Instructions for creating storage zones 24
2.1.2.3 Assigning a supply storage zone 25
2.1.3 Material Flow 25
2.1.4 Creating a material receipt location 27
2.1.4.1 Creating a material receipt location as a work cell in a separate area 28
2.1.4.2 Creating a material receipt location as a storage unit within a storage zone 29
2.1.5 Setting up storage 30
2.1.5.1 Storage areas (Storage Zones) 30
2.1.5.2 Locations 31
2.1.5.3 Storage Bins 32
2.1.5.4 Dry cabinet 33
2.1.5.5 Baking oven 35
2.1.5.6 Material Tower 37
2.1.5.7 Active Feeder Storage 39
2.1.5.8 Sealing work cell 41
2.1.6 Creating an IC programming location 42
2.2 Master Data 44
2.2.1 Material Definition 44
2.2.2 Material Category 46
2.2.3 Material Class 46
2.2.4 Manufacturer 46
2.3 Receiving incoming materials 47
2.4 Storing materials 49
2.4.1 Automatically tear down when charging lots 50
2.4.2 Automatic booking of packaging units to storage bins 52
2.5 Parking a set up table 53
2.6 Finding a set up table 54
2.7 Automatic reordering (KANBAN control) 55
2.7.1 Enabling automatic reordering 58
2.7.2 Automatically print reorder materials requirement list 60
2.8 Configuring supply and reorder rules 61
2.9 Picking material 63
2.9.1 Setting creation options for material requirements lists 63
Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 3

Contents
2.9.2 Picking material for a SIPLACE Pro setup 65

2.9.3 Picking material for a SIPLACE Pro production schedule 66
2.9.4 Picking material for a SIPLACE Pro job 67
2.9.5 Creating a material requirements list manually 68
2.9.6 Enable automatic level 2 optimization 69
2.9.7 Importing data for material picking from a file 70
2.9.8 Picking MSD material separately 72
2.9.9 Picking material in the main stock location (processing the material requirements list) 72
2.9.10 Picking strategy and picking sort order 76
2.9.11 Supply Scenarios 77
2.9.12 Intermediate storage 79
2.9.13 Picking material for external suppliers 80
2.10 Material Forecast 82
2.11 Material Manager on the line 83
2.12 MSD handling 84
2.12.1 Checking the packaging unit state / Showing the baking oven contents 87
2.12.2 Storing material for baking using the PDA 88
2.12.2.1 Reorders from the line 89
2.12.3 Picking baked material using the PDA 89
2.13 Inventory 90
2.13.1 Perpetual inventory 90
2.13.2 End-of-period inventory 91
2.13.2.1 Requirements for the end-of-period inventory 91
2.13.2.2 Limitations 91
2.13.2.3 Performing the end-of-period inventory 91
2.13.2.4 Handling error messages 93
2.14 IC Programming 94
2.15 Creating a barcode 95
2.16 Implicit bookings 95
3 User interface web 97
3.2 General functions 98
3.2.1 Log in 98
3.2.2 Layout of the main window 99
3.2.3 Logging off 100
3.2.4 Changing your password 100
3.2.5 Importing data 101
3.2.5.1 Creating an import file 102
3.2.5.2 Importing a CSV file 103
3.2.5.3 Checking an import 104
3.2.6 Exporting data 104
3.2.7 Customizing tables 105
3.2.7.1 Refreshing the table display 105
3.2.7.2 Filtering data 105
3.2.7.3 Customizing the layout 108
3.3 Material Receipt 109
3.3.1 Identify Incoming Material and Print Labels 109
3.3.1.1 Details of Packaging Units 113
3.3.2 Incoming Material Notification 115
3.3.2.1 Edit Incoming Material Notification Item 118
3.3.3 Material Receipt 120
4 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

Contents
3.4 Material requirements 122

3.4.1 Supply overview 122
3.4.2 Material Requirement List 123
3.4.2.1 Creating / Editing a material requirements list (details) 128
3.4.2.2 Importing a SIPLACE Pro setup list 134
3.4.2.3 Importing a SIPLACE Pro production schedule 136
3.4.2.4 Importing a SIPLACE Pro job 139
3.4.2.5 Importing a material requirements list from a file 141
3.4.3 Material Forecast 142
3.4.4 Material Reorder 146
3.4.5 Pick List 147
3.4.6 Transport List 149
3.5 Material Management 151
3.5.1 Material Clearing 151
3.5.2 IC Programming 153
3.5.3 MSD-Management 155
3.5.4 MSD Baking 158
3.5.5 Seal MSD Material 160
3.5.6 Packaging Unit Management 163
3.5.6.1 Transport Packaging Unit 167
3.5.6.2 Store Packaging Unit 168
3.5.6.3 Edit Packaging Unit Quantity 169
3.5.6.4 Edit Packaging Unit 171
3.5.6.5 Reprint Packaging Unit Label 174
3.5.6.6 Prepare Picking 175
3.5.7 Quality Lock 176
3.5.7.1 Quality Lock - Lock Reason 179
3.5.7.2 Quality inspection - Lock Reason 180
3.5.8 Split Packaging Unit 181
3.6 Master Data 183
3.6.1 Material Definition 183
3.6.1.1 Creating / Editing a material definition (details) 187
3.6.1.2 Assigning a material class 190
3.6.1.3 Assigning a material manufacturer 191
3.6.2 Material Category 193
3.6.2.1 Creating / Editing a material category (details) 194
3.6.3 Material Class 196
3.6.3.1 Creating / Editing a material class (details) 197
3.6.4 Manufacturer 199
3.6.4.1 Creating / Editing a manufacturer (details) 201
3.7 Inventory 203
3.7.1 Starting the perpetual inventory 203
3.7.2 Finishing the perpetual inventory 205
3.7.2.1 Entering the data counted 206
3.7.3 Starting the end-of-period inventory 207
3.7.4 Finishing the end-of-period inventory for the site 209
3.8 Configuration 210
3.8.1 Warehouse 210
3.8.1.1 Showing a replenishment threshold 212
3.8.1.2 Creating / Editing a storage bin 215
3.8.2 Storage Bin Size 216
3.8.2.1 Creating / Editing a storage bin size (details) 218

Contents
3.8.3 Sequence 219

3.8.3.1 Editing a sequence (details) 220
3.8.4 User Management 223
3.8.4.1 Creating / Editing a user 225
3.8.4.2 Add Group 226
3.8.5 Group Management 227
3.8.5.1 Creating / Editing a group 229
3.8.5.2 Assigning access rights 230
3.8.6 User and role management with OIB User Management 231
3.9 Administration 232
3.9.1 Interface (Monitoring) 232
3.9.1.1 Editing a monitor record 234
3.10 Information 235
3.10.1 Find Material 235
3.10.1.1 Spliced Packaging Unit 239
3.10.2 Material by Manufacturer 240
3.10.3 Packaging Unit Log 242
3.10.4 Packaging Unit History 244
3.10.5 MSD Baking Oven 247
4 User interface of the Warehouse Monitor 249
4.1 General information 249
4.1.1 Installing the Warehouse Monitor 249
4.1.2 Starting the Warehouse Monitor 250
4.1.3 Additional functions 250
4.2 Overview of approved picking orders 251
4.3 Configuring the Warehouse Monitor 253
4.4 About the Warehouse Monitor 254
5 User interface PDA 255
5.1 General information on operating the PDA 255
5.1.1 Requirements 255
5.1.2 Main window 257
5.1.3 Connecting / Disconnecting the PDA 258
5.1.4 Exiting PDA applications 261
5.1.5 Context menu 262
5.1.5.1 Context menu - About 263
5.1.5.2 Context menu - IP Configuration 264
5.1.5.3 Context menu - Message List 265
5.1.5.4 Context menu - Error Log 265
5.1.5.5 Context menu - Help 267
5.1.5.6 Context menu - Home 267
5.1.5.7 Context menu - Exit 268
5.2 Material Receipt dialog 268
5.3 Picklist Processing dialog 270
5.4 Manual Storage dialog 276
5.4.1 Error messages when placing in storage 278
5.5 Material Reorder dialog 280
5.6 Park Table dialog 282
5.7 Process Packaging Unit List dialog 283
5.8 MSD folder 286
5.8.1 MSD Start/Stop dialog 288

Contents
5.8.2 MSD Reset dialog 289

5.8.3 MSD Baking dialog 290
5.9 Administration folder 291
5.9.1 Withdraw Quantity dialog 292
5.9.2 Packaging Unit Inventory dialog 292
5.9.3 Set empty and discard dialog 294
5.10 Information folder 295
5.10.1 Packaging Unit dialog 296
5.10.2 Find Material dialog 296
5.10.3 Browse Material dialog 297
6 User interface for the "Material Manager" app 299
6.1 General information 299
6.1.1 Requirements 299
6.1.2 Main window 300
6.1.3 Starting the "Material Manager" app 301
6.1.4 Menu list 301
6.1.4.1 Registration 301
6.1.4.2 Version 302
6.1.4.3 Logging 303
6.1.4.4 Settings 304
6.1.4.5 About 304
6.2 Main Menu 305
6.2.1 Storage 306
6.2.1.1 Manual Storage 307
6.2.1.2 Automatic Storage 308
6.2.2 Picking 309
6.2.3 Reorder 312
6.2.3.1 Reorder Settings 313
6.2.4 Packaging Unit Management 314
6.2.5 Inventory 320
6.2.6 Find Material 321
7 Changing the Material Manager configuration (OIB) 323
7.2 Common tab 325
7.3 E-Mail Escalation tab 327
7.4 Incoming tab 329
7.5 Database Maintenance tab 333
7.6 Miscellaneous tab 334
7.7 External Connections tab 337
7.8 Packaging Unit Management tab 338
7.9 MSD Baking tab 342
7.10 Messages tab 344
8 Appendix 345
8.1 Data structures for the import 345
8.1.1 Material Definition dialog 345
8.1.2 Material Category dialog 348
8.1.3 Material Class dialog 349
8.1.4 Manufacturerdialog 349
8.1.5 Warehouse dialog 350

Contents
8.1.6 Material Requirements list dialog - Import from File 351

8.1.7 Replenishment Thresholds dialog 351
8.2 Data structures for the export 352
8.2.1 Material reordering 352
8.2.2 Kardex 354
8.2.3 Haenel 355
8.2.4 Inventory reports 356
8.2.5 Packaging unit data changes 357
8.3 Troubleshooting 358
8.4 Web services 359
8.5 Web Service Client 360
8.6 Setup Center External Control 360
8.7 Processing packaging unit chains 360
8.8 Packaging unit data from the MES 361

1 Preface
1 Preface
This user manual provides an overview of the functions in WORKS Material Manager. You will find all
the important information you need here for working with the Material Manager.
1.1 Brief outline

You use WORKS Material Manager to manage SMT materials as packaging units across multiple
storage locations. The Material Manager has interfaces to modules in the WORKS Software Suite, such
as WORKS Setup Center or SIPLACE Pro, as well as to popular ERP systems, and enhances these with
a wide range of functions for SMT-specific material logistics.
You operate the Material Manager using a web application, supplemented by PDAs with integrated
barcode scanners for the warehouse processes on site.
The two core elements of the Material Manager that need to be configured are the master data and the
Factory Layout generated by OIB.
The Factory Layout is edited using WORKS Studio in the Factory Explorer OIB module. This is where
you map and configure the various incoming materials, storage, pre setup and production areas of your
plant. The more carefully you map your plant, the better the Material Manager will help you to find the
exact location and exact quantities of materials.
You define the materials to be managed by the Material Manager in the master data together with their
attributes, for instance, part number, description, type, MSD level, as well as the manufacturers or
suppliers from which this material is ordered. For materials to exist in the Material Manager, you first
enter them in the goods receipt department so that they can then be stored in a storage location. To
identify the packaging unit uniquely, the Material Manager generates labels with individual barcodes that
are affixed on the packaging unit. By logging each individual movement of the materials, the Material
Manager always knows which material is available at which location, and in what quantities.
You can use the Material Manager to determine specific material requirements and provide them in a
timely manner. You do this by creating material requirements lists using SIPLACE Pro setup lists,
production schedules, or jobs and processing them in the Material Manager.
Explicit / Implicit bookings

In the Material Manager, each packaging unit is always at precisely one location in the factory layout in
which you have mapped your business to resemble the real situation in your plant as closely as possible.
The booking of a packaging unit to another location can take place explicitly, e.g. by scanning barcodes
in the warehouse with a PDA, or implicitly through the logic implemented in the Material Manager. For
example, during the tear down process on a machine, the materials are automatically booked to a
specific storage unit in the storage zone defined in the Material Manager for this purpose.

1 Preface
Process overview
Figure 1 - 1: Process overview
Incoming material
l Identify and create packaging units and then print labels.
l Forward material information to WORKS Setup Center.
Storage
l Warehouse management for SMT material based on packaging units.
l Support for various storage systems (Kardex, Royonic, SMD Tower) or manual storage.
l Find materials easily using the convenient browse feature.
l MSD component handling, keep track of MSD open times and lock the material or track if the
open time has been exceeded (WORKS Setup Center).

Pre setup area
l Set up materials on the component table using SIPLACE Pro setup lists or production schedules
with the aid of Setup Center.

l Optimized material reordering.
Production
l Log and report consumed component quantities for each packaging unit.
l Create material requirements lists for the timely reordering of materials.
B2MML-interface
l Online inventory support through ongoing feedback on current stock levels.
l Import packaging unit data, e.g. from ERP.

1 Preface
1.2 Requirements
The system requirements for installing the Material Manager are described in the installation manual.
As the Material Manager (client) is a web application, it can be accessed from any computer within your
network.
To display the Material Manager, you need Internet Explorer version 8 or higher or Microsoft EDGE
Chromium in Enterprise Modus.
Printing barcode labels
Note
Code 39 or 3 of 9
The Material Manager uses Code 39, also known as 3 of 9, for printing barcode labels. This
code contains an alphanumeric character set (upper case letters and digits) as well as the 6
special characters -.$/+% and a space.
Other special characters and German umlauts are not included in this code and are therefore
excluded for use on barcode labels.
1.3 Signs and symbols used

Typographic conventions
this font indicates control elements and user interface elements of the software
this font indicates the titles of the individual areas of the user interface
indicates steps in a procedure
1., 2., 3., ... indicates steps that are to be performed in the specified order
Conventions for the use of warning symbols

Note
In these instructions, a note provides important information about a product or draws attention
to a specific part of the instructions that should be read particularly carefully.
Caution
Caution as used in these instructions means that damage to equipment may occur if the
caution notes are not observed.
1.4 Differences in the user interface display

You opted for one of the following versions of Material Manager during installation, depending on the
license you purchased.
l WORKS Material Manager standard installation (full version)
l WORKS Material Manager basic installation
l WORKS Material Manager for MSA installation
This manual contains a description of the full version of the Material Manager user interface.

1 Preface
If you chose the basic version or MSA version of the Material Manager, some of the dialogs and
functions described in this manual are not available.
The basic version of the Material Manager is intended for users who are mainly interested in operating
the Material Tower. The basic version contains only those parts of the full version that are necessary for
operating the Material Tower. All other functions of the full version are unavailable and are displayed
differently or not at all in the user interface.
The MSA version of the Material Manager is intended for MSA customers who do not want to use the
Material Manager for warehouse management. The MSA version contains all functions required for
working with the Material Setup Assistant. The warehouse management functions of the full version are
unavailable and are not displayed in the user interface.
1.5 Online help

WORKS Material Manager offers context-sensitive online help that describes the individual dialogs of
the user interface. All other descriptions in this user manual are also contained in the online help.
To start the online help, click at the bottom of the Material Manager.

1 Preface
1.6 Overview of editions

Edition Changes
05/2014 First edition
10/2014 Changes:
l Material Managers available as a full version and a basic version (for operating
the Material Tower).
New dialogs:
l Supply overview
l Transport List
04/2015 New dialogs:
l MSD Baking
l Seal MSD Material
07/2015 Changes:
l New: "Automatic reordering" workflow
l New: Function for importing a material requirements list from a file
l New: Function for importing replenishment thresholds from a file
l Enhancement of the Picklist Processing PDA function for the Tower and
automatic storage systems
01/2016 Modified dialogs:
l Material Definition
l Material Requirements List
l Material Forecast (now also for lots)
l Edit Packaging Unit
l The ConfigurationHelper has been updated
05/2016 New dialogs:
l ConfigurationHelper - Essential tab
Available after you install the Essential version of the Material Manager. This
version was specifically designed for MSA customers who do not want to use
the Material Manager for warehouse management.
Modified dialogs:
l MSD-Management
l Packaging Unit Management
l Packaging Unit Management / Split Packaging Unit
l PDA function Picklist Processing

1 Preface
Edition Changes
08/2016 Changes:
The Factory Layout definition has been removed from the Material Manager user
interface completely.
In the new version of Material Manager, the Factory Layout is created and edited
exclusively in the FactoryExplorer OIB module.
New dialogs:
Packaging Unit Management / Prepare Picking
PDA function Process Packaging Unit List
Modified dialogs:
Packaging Unit Management
02/2017 Renaming:
l SIPLACE Material Manager is now called ASM Material Manager
l SIPLACE Setup Center is now called ASM Setup Center
l SIPLACE Studio is now called ASM Studio
l SIPLACE Support Media is now called ASM Support Media
New functions / descriptions:
l Separate picking of MSD material
l "Intermediate storage" workflow
l "Troubleshooting" section (see appendix)
07/2017 New functions / descriptions:

l Optimization of retrieval speed from the Material Tower Cluster for the various
material requirements list types
l Separate generation of thematically related material requirements lists
l Automatic teardown of packaging units with setup status when charging them
l Handover of material to external suppliers using the Subcontracting
12/2017 Changes:
l Configuration of Material Manager no longer using ConfigurationHelper but
using OIB.
l Description of additional workflows
10/2018 New functions:
l In IC programming, splitting the programmed components over multiple
packaging units is possible.
l The central settings in OIB allow automatic Level 2 optimization of SIPLACE
Pro lots to be enabled.
l The automatic picking behavior of the tower can be configured.
l New storage location type “Active Feeder Storage” for packaging units set up
on feed modules

1 Preface
Edition Changes
l "Material Manager" app
l Set baking times and the maximum number of rebakes for components of
different thicknesses.
l Park set up tables
l Find set up tables
l Check packaging unit state for packaging units currently in a baking oven.
l Show baking oven contents
l Warehouse Monitor - Overview of picking orders currently approved (can be
configured)
l Configure criteria for checking the consistency of components for IC
programming
l Sort pick lists by date type
l New list type called Pick Exact List to request a defined number of
components of a material
l Material Definition dialog: Set the default value for the permitted shelf life of a
material.
The value set here is used when creating new packaging units if the material
supplier does not specify the permitted shelf life.
l Packaging Unit Management dialog: Filter packaging units by Expired status
l “Configure supply and reorder rules” workflow
For supplying production lines, rules can be set up for the supply storage zone
or reorder storage zone to be used to supply the relevant line.
l Browse Material dialog: Show Material in Splice Chains with ABE
If this option is enabled, splice chains containing a subordinate link that
matches the required material are also displayed.
l Material forecast dialog: Alternative components
Alternative components that already exist in the system are not included in the
forecast calculation. The result of the calculation is always based on the
preferred material configured in SIPLACE Pro.
l “Enable automatic reordering” workflow: Alternative components
Splice chains consisting of various components are ignored in the calculations
for automatic reordering.
l Support users with credential types Username/Password Credential.
l Data structure of Packaging unit chains
l Automatic booking of packaging units to storage bins
l Packaging unit data from the MES

1 Preface
1.7 ASMPT SMT solutions on the World Wide Web

Simply log onto our home page at smt.asmpt.com.
The different sections contain information about our products, services, and contact persons.
In addition, registered users have access to a wide range of information and applications. You can view
additional information about our products and services and access a variety of ASMPT online tools, such
as:
l Product documentation in the ASMPT toolkit
l Training modules in the ASMPT academy
l Spare parts catalogs in the ASMPT webshop
Registration is easy:
1. Simply click on MyASMPT and then on Register.
2. Fill in the registration form and submit it.
Soon afterwards, you will receive your access authorization with user name and password.

1 Preface

2 Workflows
2 Workflows
This section provides an overview and descriptions of the most important functions in WORKS Material
Manager.
2.1 Plant Layout

Material Manager complies with the ISA-95 standard for describing the plant. This standard defines the
elements that make up a hierarchical model of the plant.
In the following, you will see an overview of the individual elements of the factory layout.
l Enterprise is the highest element of the tree structure and there is only one.
l The Site represents the production environment at a location.
If you have several locations in your organization, you can create a site for each of them.
A site can be split into any number of areas.
l An area is a place within your plant, e.g. a production hall or warehouse.
Areas may be individual outsourced locations or individual areas within your plant, such as a
production hall or warehouse.
Areas are divided into different subareas (sublocations).
Depending on how sublocations are used, a distinction is made between the following types:
l Storage zones
A storage zone represents one or more specific storage areas, e.g. a warehouse building. This
warehouse may have many locations (storage units) where materials are stored.
l Storage units
A storage unit represents a specific location within a storage zone.
l Production lines
A production line represents a complete production line consisting of several placement machines.
The term production line in the ISA-95 standard refers to an entire production line that is divided into
individual work cells.
l Work cells
A work cell represents a specific type of actual work area in your production line.
The individual elements in your plant are mapped in a hierarchy as shown in the basic layout below.
Figure 2 - 1: Basic plant layout

2 Workflows
Example:
Figure 2 - 2: Example of a possible plant layout
Use the elements provided to develop a plan for mapping your plant in Material Manager.
Note
Description of working with the FactoryExplorer OIB module
From Material Manager version 2.4, the Factory Layout is no longer modeled in the Material
Manager user interface. It is done exclusively using WORKS Studio in the Factory Explorer
OIB module. For a detailed description of working with the FactoryExplorer OIB module,
refer to the WORKS Operations Information Broker User Guide, item no. [00900459-xx].

2 Workflows
2.1.1 Creating a Factory Layout

From Material Manager version 2.4, the Factory Layout is no longer modeled in the Material Manager
user interface. It is done exclusively using WORKS Studio in the Factory Explorer OIB module.
To start WORKS Studio, double-click the WORKS Studion icon on your desktop or, from
Windows 8, on the corresponding tile.
The WORKS Studio home screen is displayed.
Click Factory Explorer.

The main Factory Explorer window is displayed.
Click Factory Layout in the menu bar.

The main Factory Layout window is displayed.

2 Workflows
In this dialog, you can add new objects to the Factory Layout, rename objects, or delete objects that are
no longer required.
In the Factory Layout section, the tree structure shows a representation of your production environment
as currently defined in Material Manager. For a general description of the structure, see Plant Layout on
page 19.
On the right of the dialog you will see the properties of the object you have selected in the tree structure.
Adding or deleting objects in the Factory Layout

1. To edit the Factory Layout, select the object you want to extend or delete in the tree structure.
2. Using the context menu (right-click) or the menu bar in the header of the window, select the function
you want to perform.
3. When creating a new object, you have to give it a descriptive name.
The new object will then be displayed at the selected position in the tree structure.
To change the properties of an object, click Central settings in the menu bar. For a description of this
dialog, see Editing the properties of the Factory Layout on page 22.
2.1.2 Editing the properties of the Factory Layout

From Material Manager version 2.4, the Factory Layout is no longer modeled in the Material Manager
user interface. It is done exclusively using WORKS Studio in the Factory Explorer OIB module.
To start WORKS Studio, double-click the WORKS Studio icon on your desktop or, from


2 Workflows
1. Click Central Settings in the menu bar.

The main window for editing object properties is displayed.
2. Under Application Settings, select the Material Manager application and then one of the two entries
Inheritable Factory Layout Settings or Non-inheritable Factory Layout Settings.
3. In the Factory Layout section, the tree structure shows a representation of your production
environment as currently defined in Material Manager. For a general description of the structure, see
Plant Layout on page 19.
In the center of the dialog you will see the current properties of the object you have selected in the
tree structure. The properties can be edited in the subsequent dialog.
Changing the properties of an object
1. In the Factory Layout section, select the object whose properties you want to change.
The current properties of the selected object are shown on the right of the dialog.
2. Change the properties of the selected object.
The changes take effect immediately and do not have to be explicitly saved.
Note
Help texts and tooltips
General information about the selected object and descriptions of the individual data fields
and options are displayed at the right-hand edge of the dialog.
You can also display this information as a tooltip by positioning the mouse pointer over a
displayed data field or option.
Note
Important additional information
When editing the Factory Layout, also observe the information provided in the following
sections.

2 Workflows
2.1.2.1 Naming conventions for storage units
Note
Naming conventions
When assigning the individual names, note that storage units are processed in alphabetical
order during the picking process.
Note
Materials are automatically booked to the storage unit that comes first alphanumerically in a
storage zone during teardown. Therefore, it is useful to name the storage unit according to
the "return transportation" of materials, e.g. "00_PARKINGPLACE".
2.1.2.2 Instructions for creating storage zones
Note
Defining the PickingPlace
Exactly one storage unit of the PickingPlace type must be defined for each storage zone.
The PickingPlace is a virtual storage location to which materials can be booked if they are
being moved, for example, if they are being transported from a warehouse to the line or from
the line back to the warehouse on a trolley or in a box.
Exception:
External storage does not contain subordinate storage locations in the factory layout,
therefore no PickingPlace.
Note
Supply storage zone and reorder storage zone
Supply storage zones are used for picking for setup and orders for a line. If necessary,
the line is supplied from reorder storage zones during production. The supply storage
zone and the reorder storage zone are normally identical.
When the Material Setup Assistant (MSA) is used, the warehouse has a two-tier
structure, so two different storage zones must be created in Material Manager.
One storage zone serves as the supply storage zone for the line. This storage zone
holds the material designated for reuse by the MSA.
The second storage zone holds the rest of the material. Material reorders are filled
from this storage zone. Material that is no longer needed in the supply storage zone is
transferred to the reorder storage zone by the MSA.
Note
Intermediate storage
You can use storage zones adjacent to the line as intermediate storage for storing
large quantities of refill material for rapid access or to temporarily store material that
has already been picked for a specific setup.
Unlike normal storage zones, the packaging units stored here do not lose their setup
information and are each reserved for a specific setup.

2 Workflows
2.1.2.3 Assigning a supply storage zone

A production line is supplied with materials by just one supply storage zone.
To assign a supply storage zone to a production line, proceed as follows:
1. In the Plant Layout select the production line to which you want to assign a supply storage zone.
2. Select the storage zone from which the production line is to be supplied with materials in the Supply
storage zone drop-down list.
Note
The supply storage zone and the production line do not need to be in the same area.
2.1.3 Material Flow

For a production line, you define a single supply storage zone, from which the material for initial
requirements and any refill material will come. In addition, every production line can be assigned a
reorder storage zone from which reorders from the line are delivered. In most cases, however, the
supply storage zone and the reorder storage zone will be identical.
A supply storage zone can also be defined for a storage zone. This can be further intermediate storage
or, typically, the main stock location (Storage Zone 1 in the figure).
The main stock location can be storage managed by the Material Manager or by another material
management system (see Storage areas (Storage Zones) on page 30).
To accelerate the material flow, you can have intermediate storage filled automatically (see Automatic
reordering (KANBAN control) on page 55).
Material flow for reorders from the line

If, for example, material is issued to a production line, it is ordered in the reorder storage zone set for that
production line. If the ordered material is not available there, it is requested from the next storage level.
This can mean that several storage zones are affected by an order.
To reduce transport distances and thus also transport times, for each storage zone you can specify
whether the ordered material is to be supplied to the ordering storage zone or directly to the location
specified as the target location in the order.

2 Workflows
Supply material to the ordering storage zone when reordered

The material is delivered to the storage zone that requested the material. From there, the material is
delivered to the line along with the material that is already available there.
Supply material to the target location and mark as completed when reordered
The material is delivered to the location specified as the target location in the order. This can be a
storage zone or a line that has reordered required material.
Note
MSA
If MSA is used, the line is supplied from two different storage zones.

2 Workflows
2.1.4 Creating a material receipt location

All incoming materials and material packaging units are identified by a scanner when they are received
and assigned to an existing material definition in the system. Both simple barcodes and 2D barcodes
can be used for this procedure.
In order to track materials in the system, a unique packaging unit ID is assigned to each packaging unit
and printed on a label, which is then stuck on the packaging unit.
As soon as the material has been identified, it exists in the system - together with the attributes entered -
and can be tracked throughout the entire production process and moved within the identification points
(storage locations).
There are two logical places where you can create a material receipt location:
l As a work cell within an area created specifically for this purpose.
Use this option if there is a central material receipt point in your factory where all materials delivered
are recorded.
l As a storage unit within a storage zone.
Use this option if there is are several decentralized material receipt points in your factory where
materials delivered are recorded.

2 Workflows
2.1.4.1 Creating a material receipt location as a work cell in a separate area
Start the WORKS Studio by double-clicking on the symbol on your Desktop or, in Windows 8
and higher, on the corresponding tile.

2. In the Application Settings - WORKS Material Manager tree structure, mark the entry Non-
inheritable Factory Layout Settings.
3. Create a new area in the Factory Layout tree structure.
In the new area, create a work cell in which you want to set up the identify location.
Select the new work cell in the tree structure.
4. Make sure that the Work Cell option is selected under Type in the General area.
5. In the Work Station area, enter the name of the computer to which you want to connect the scanner
for scanning the packaging unit barcodes under Host-ID.
6. In the Work Station area, enable the Identify Location option.
7. Under Label Printer Path you can specify a label printer to be used for this work cell. If no printer is
specified, the defined default printer is used.

2 Workflows
2.1.4.2 Creating a material receipt location as a storage unit within a storage zone

2. In the Application Settings - Material Manager tree structure, mark the entry Non-inheritable
Factory Layout Settings.
3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, create a new storage unit in the storage zone where you want to
use the identify location.
Select the new storage unit in the tree structure.
4. Make sure that the Storage Unit option is selected under Type in the General area.
6. Under Label Printer Path you can specify a label printer to be used for this work cell. If no printer is

2 Workflows
2.1.5 Setting up storage
2.1.5.1 Storage areas (Storage Zones)

A storage zone is a logical unit made up of several storage units, such as racks and the Material Tower,
where material is stored.
Essentially, there are 2 types of storage zones:
l Internal storage zones managed by the Material Manager.
l External storage zones managed by another system, e.g. SAP.
In some configurations, it makes sense to manage only part of the storage with the Material Manager
and the rest with another system.
Example:
The SMD storage in production is managed by the Material Manager and the central warehouse by
SAP.
To set whether a storage zone is an internal or external storage zone:

3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, select the storage zone you want to set.
4. In the General area you will see the option Managed by WORKS Material Manager.
Enabling this option means that the storage zone is managed internally by the Material Manager.
If you do not enable this option, the storage zone is managed externally by another system. In this
case, you must also set which interface the Material Manager is to use to communicate with the
external system under Connection Type in the Inheritable Factory Layout Settings.
Remark: External storage does not contain subordinate storage locations in the factory layout.

2 Workflows
Note
Defining the PickingPlace
Exactly one storage unit of the PickingPlace type must be defined for each storage zone.
The PickingPlace is a virtual storage location to which materials can be booked if they are
being moved, for example, if they are being transported from a warehouse to the line or from
the line back to the warehouse on a trolley or in a box.
Exception:
External storage does not contain subordinate storage locations in the factory layout,
therefore no PickingPlace.
2.1.5.2 Locations
A location represents one or more specific storage units of a particular type within a storage zone.
For each location, you can define replenishment thresholds. You use the replenishment threshold rules
to specify when the stock levels of the individual materials are to be replenished automatically. For
further information, see Showing a replenishment threshold on page 212.
The Material Manager supports a variety of storage unit types:
Storage unit
General storage unit, e.g. rack or dry cabinet (default setting)
ASM Material Tower
Automated storage system
Royonic
Automatic storage system from Micronic (formerly Royonic)
Kardex
Automatic storage system from Kardex
Hänel
Automatic storage system from Hänel
PickingPlace
Storage location at the work station
ActiveFeederPool, PassiveFeederPool, RedBox, ParkingPlace
Storage units that are used exclusively by SIPLACE Order Manager and may not be used anywhere
else.
Baking
Work cell where the drying oven is located.
Active Feeder Storage
Storage units for packaging units set up on feed modules (see also section Active Feeder Storage on
page 39).
Note
Naming conventions
When assigning the individual names, note that storage units are processed in alphabetical
order during the storage process.
Note
Materials are automatically booked to the storage unit that comes first alphabetically in a
storage zone during setup. It is useful therefore to name the storage unit for the "return
transportation" of materials accordingly, e.g. "00_PARKINGPLACE".

2 Workflows
2.1.5.3 Storage Bins

Storage bins are used within a storage location for storing, transferring and picking the materials you
use. All actions associated with these activities are logged in the Material Manager and therefore are
always traceable. You can use the data collected to determine which material is available where, and in
what quantities.
Further information about creating storage bins can be found under Warehouse on page 210.
Storage bin sizes

If required, you can define different storage bin sizes in the Material Manager corresponding to the
materials used in your production. When receiving packaging units, the materials are then only stored in
storage bins whose size matches the size of the packaging unit. This does not apply to manual storage.
The storage bin sizes are required by the automatic storage systems to determine storage bins matching
the packaging unit.
Further information about creating storage bin sizes can be found under Storage Bin Size on page 216.
Route optimization and designation of storage bins

Materials are normally stored in the next available free storage bin in a storage zone in alphanumeric
order.
When creating the racks and storage bins in the Material Manager, you should consider which routes
you have optimized or want to optimize in your storage. The time required for picking materials should be
kept as short as possible to ensure that production can be supplied with material promptly.
The optimized routes in your physical storage can be mapped one-to-one in the Material Manager by
appropriate organization of the racks and designation of the storage bins.
Two examples:
Figure 2 - 3: Length-optimized route

2 Workflows
Figure 2 - 4: Process-based route
Figure 2 - 5: Legend
1. Rack 3. Route
2. Storage bin 4. Route to next rack
2.1.5.4 Dry cabinet

In order to extend the usability of a material with limited floor life (MSD Level > 1), the material can be
stored in a dry cabinet. When stored in a dry cabinet, the MSD remaining time for a packaging unit is
paused, and is restarted on picking.
By default, you create a dry cabinet as a storage unit of the Storage Unit type.
If the dry cabinet is in an area designated for material reuse, you still need to create the dry cabinet as a
storage unit of the Intermediate Refill Storage type. MSD material can then be stored temporarily in this
dry cabinet during non-production times. Note that the MSD material stored here must always be
removed manually before the start of production.
Enabling the MSD-Safe option specifies that this location is a dry storage unit.
Start WORKS Studio by double-clicking the symbol on your desktop or, in Windows 8 and
higher, on the corresponding tile.

2 Workflows
1. Click Central settings in the menu bar.

3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, select the location where you want to set up the sealing work
cell.
4. In the General area, select the Storage Unit type.
5. In the MSD Handling section, enable the MSD-Safe option.

2 Workflows
2.1.5.5 Baking oven
Note
You configure the Maximum number of bakings and the baking times for the different
material thicknesses in WORKS Studio in the Factory Explorer OIB module in the Central
Settings menu under Global Settings on the MSD Baking tab (see MSD Baking tab on page
342).
After opening the airtight packaging or removing a packaging unit from a dry storage unit, a material with
a limited floor life (MSD level > 1) is only suitable for production according to the MSD level specified by
the manufacturer.
In order to extend the floor life of a packaging unit, it is possible to remove some or all of the moisture
from the packaging unit following a strictly defined process in a drying oven specially designed for this
purpose.
Depending on the baking behavior the MSD open time is reset:
l Selection Manual: When the baking process for the packaging unit has completely finished, you can
reset the MSD open time for the packaging unit to a defined value.
l Selection JEDEC-0338: When the baking process is completely finished, the MSD open time is
always completely reset.
You must create a baking oven as a storage unit of the Baking type. In Oven Type set the temperature
to which the baking oven is to be heated.
higher, the corresponding tile.

2 Workflows

3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, select the storage unit where you want to set up the baking
oven.
4. In the General area, select the Baking type.
5. In the MSD Baking area, select the Baking behavior of the baking oven.
6. In Oven Type, select the temperature to which the baking oven is to be heated.

2 Workflows
2.1.5.6 Material Tower

The Material Tower is an ultra-compact storage system for packaging units. Storing and picking are
controlled by software and are fully automatic. Multiple Material Towers can be combined into a cluster.
You must create an Material Tower as a storage unit of the ASMPT Material Tower type. Under Host
ID enter the name or IP address of the computer on which the control software for the storage system is
installed.

3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, select the storage location where you want to set up the
Material Tower.
4. In the General area, select the ASMPT Material Tower type.
5. Under Work Station, enter the computer name or IP address of the computer on which the control
software for the storage system is installed under Host ID.

2 Workflows
Automatic processing of pick lists

For each storage unit of the ASM Material Tower type, you can use the Autostart Options section of the
storage unit properties to configure the list types for which processing of the pick list is to be started
automatically.
o If the autostart option is enabled for a list type, processing of the pick list starts as soon as it has been
approved by Material Manager. It is not then necessary for the operator to start the picking process
on the PDA.
Multiple storage units in each storage zone can use the autostart option.
Within a storage zone, the pick lists initiated by the enabled autostart option are processed in
alphabetical order of the storage unit names.
If insufficient material is available, missing components lists are generated automatically and sent to
the assigned supply storage zone.
You can use this option to make the working process easier for the operator, e.g. if particular list
types are preferred or picking is to be carried out exclusively on this tower.
o If the autostart option is not enabled for a list type, the picking process for a pick list of this type must
be started by the operator on the PDA.
Speeding up picking
If several towers combine to form a tower cluster, for each storage location you can use OIB in the
Central Settings to set the picking speed for the different list types under Boost Material Tower Picking
Speed in the storage location properties.
o If the option for accelerated picking is enabled for a list type, when picking the packaging units from
all towers in the tower cluster are picked in parallel. When picking, the packaging units are issued as
soon as a free removal bin is registered by the tower cluster. Parallel picking accelerates the picking
process as several towers in the tower cluster are working at the same time.
Disadvantage: The picking order of the packaging units does not correspond to the order entered in
the pick list and the packaging units have to be sorted subsequently.
o If the option for accelerated picking is not enabled for a list type, when picking the subsequent
packaging unit is only issued when the previous packaging unit has been removed from the issue
chute. This means that the packaging units are issued in the order entered in the pick list.
Disadvantage: Picking takes longer as with this setting only one tower in the tower cluster is working
at a time.

2 Workflows
2.1.5.7 Active Feeder Storage

Storage locations of the Active Feeder Storage type are storage units in which packaging units that are
set up (status in Setup Center = setup) on feed modules are stored and picked.
Active Feeder Storage acts like a buffer, as the set up feed modules stored there can be reused quickly
and easily.
Note
The Active Feeder Storage is managed by a 3rd party module, which is not part of Material
Manager.
Active Feeder Storage cannot be used in setup areas managed by the Material Setup
Assistant (MSA).
higher, the corresponding tile.

2. In the Application Settings - Material Manager tree structure, mark the entry Non-inheritable
3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, select the storage unit where you want to set up the Active
Feeder Storage.
4. In the General area, select the Active Feeder Storage type.
5. Under Work Station, enter the name or IP address of the computer on which the control software for
the storage system is installed under Host ID.

2 Workflows
Automatic processing of pick lists

For each storage unit of the Active Feeder Storage type, you can use the Autostart Options section of
the storage unit properties to configure the list types for which processing of the pick list is to be started
automatically.
l If the autostart option is enabled for a list type, processing of the pick list starts as soon as it has been
approved by Material Manager. It is not then necessary for the operator to start the picking process
on the PDA.
If insufficient material is available, missing components lists are generated automatically and sent to
the assigned supply storage zone.
l If the autostart option is not enabled for a list type, the picking process for a picking list of this type
must be started by the operator on the PDA.

2 Workflows
2.1.5.8 Sealing work cell

sealed in airtight packaging.
You must create a sealing work cell as a location of the Storage Unit type. Under Host-ID, enter the
name of the computer to which you want to connect the scanner for scanning the packaging unit
barcodes.

3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, select the storage location where you want to set up the sealing
work cell.
4. Under Common select the Storage Unit type.
5. In the Work Station area, enter the name of the computer you want to use for scanning the
packaging unit barcodes under Host-ID.
Under Label Printer Path you can specify a label printer to be used for this work cell. If no printer is

2 Workflows
2.1.6 Creating an IC programming location

An IC programming location is a work cell within a production line.
You use it to transform a raw part into an actual product, e.g. installing firmware on a blank EPROM.
You can then select the IC programming location defined here to process materials using the Machine
drop-down list in the Material Management - IC Programming dialog.
To define an IC programming space, proceed as follows:
1. Create a new production line in the Factory Layout tree structure.

In the new production line, create a work cell in which you want to set up the IC programming
location. Select the new work cell in the tree structure.
5. In the Work Station area, enable the IC Programming Location option.
6. Under ICL Label Printer Path you can specify a label printer to be used for this work cell. If no printer
is specified, the defined default printer is used.

2 Workflows
Checking the source packaging unit
To ensure the consistency of the components used for IC programming, the Material Manager checks
whether certain properties of the packaging units to be processed are the same.
By default, all data displayed in the list as well as the part numbers of the packaging units are checked.
For certain production requirements, however, it is possible to restrict the checking of common
properties.
Disable the properties of the packaging units that are not to be compared during the check.
Date Code
Date code assigned by the manufacturer for tracking the delivered material.
Manufacturer Part Number
Material name assigned by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer
Name of the manufacturer of the packaging unit.
Manufacturer Packaging Unit
Packaging unit name assigned by the manufacturer.
The part number of the packaging units is always checked and cannot be configured.

2 Workflows
2.2 Master Data

To manage and track materials using the Material Manager, they first need to be made known to the
system in the form of master data. This master data is differentiated as follows:
l Material Category
l Material Class
l Manufacturer
Note
Difference between material / packaging unit
You can have the same materials in different quantities and order them from different
manufacturers (e.g. a 4.7 kOhm resistor).
A packaging unit refers to the particular identity (e.g. reel) of a material. Each packaging unit
has a unique ID and only ever exists once.
2.2.1 Material Definition

You define the attributes of a material in a material definition. For a description of the dialog used for this,
see Creating / Editing a material definition (details) on page 187.
A material definition is made up of the ID (part number, internal name of the material), the article number
(name of the component in SIPLACE Pro), and other attributes and default values for goods receipt.
Each material definition must have at least one entry concerning the manufacturer from whom the
material is ordered. Since you can order the same material from different manufacturers or suppliers,
you can also assign more than one manufacturer to each material. The respective manufacturer names
and other material details are entered in the data record for each manufacturer. These entries are
required later for identifying the material when the goods are received.
To provide a clear overview of where a material is used, you can assign it to one or more suitable
material classes.
To make the description on creating a material definition more interesting, we construct a situation in
which you order a material from 2 different manufacturers.
Creating a material definition

1. Switch within Master Data in the Material Manager to the Material Definition dialog.
2. Click the Material Definition tab.
3. Click Create New Material.
4. Enter the name of the material for commercial purposes in Part Number.
If you are editing a material definition that has already been saved, the content of this field cannot be
changed.
5. In Article Number, enter the internal material ID used for technical purposes, e.g., as used in
SIPLACE Pro and in the Setup Center.
6. Select a suitable Material Type.
7. Select a suitable Material Class.
8. Select a suitable Material Category. (optional)
9. If the material has a limited floor life, select a suitable MSD Level.

2 Workflows
10. Enter a description of the material in Description.

11. Specify a value for the material in Price. (optional)
12. Specify whether the material is to be held in the Active Feeder Pool in Material Reuse.
13. Select the material thickness of the component in Thickness.
14. Select a suitable option in Package Management.
This option is only available for the Raw Material material type.
Enable this option if the material is to be delivered on a reel or stick and managed as a packaging unit
in the Material Manager.
Do not enable this option if the material is bulk material or similar.
15. Select a suitable option in Obsolete.
Enable this option if the material can no longer be processed or is already obsolete and can be
deleted.
If the material is obsolete, it can no longer be accepted in the Identify Incoming Material dialog.
16. Enable the Approval Required option if approval is required for lots of this material.
17. Enable the Brightness Class Required option if the brightness class needs to be specified when
receiving (identifying) incoming material.
This option is only useful for LEDs.
If this option is enabled, storage of the material is refused if no brightness class is defined for the
packaging unit.
18. Enable the Smart FEFO Required option if the Smart FEFO mechanism (First Expire First Out) is to
be applied in the Identify Incoming Material dialog.
To apply Smart FEFO, the value "Active" must be set to "True" in the Smart FEFO node of the
ConfigurationApplicationServer.xml file on a project-specific basis. A 3rd party software solution
must evaluate the IncomingBatchID and SmartFEFO fields (B2MML Submessage - Material Lot –
Get Lot) using the Material Manager interfaces.
The Material Manager does not currently use Smart FEFO as a picking strategy.
19. Enable the BGA option if the material is a BGA (Ball Grid Array) component.
20. Click OK.
The next steps are executed in the Material Definition - Assign Manufacturer dialog (see Assigning a
material manufacturer on page 191).
21. In the table at the bottom of the Material Definition dialog, select Material Manufacturer in the drop-
down list of the tab on the left.
22. Click Assign Manufacturer.
23. Enter the name of the manufacturer in Manufacturer.
The manufacturer entered must already exist in the system.
24. Enter the manufacturer's material name in Part Number (Manufacturer).
25. Fill the remaining fields with the other manufacturer's data for the material.
26. Click OK.
If you order the material from several manufacturers (suppliers), repeat the last 5 steps for each of
these manufacturers.
If you want to assign a material class to the material definition:
27. In the table at the bottom of the Material Definition dialog, select Material Class in the drop-down list
of the tab on the left.
28. Click Add Material Class.

2 Workflows
29. Select the material class(es) that you want to assign to the material definition.
30. Click OK.
2.2.2 Material Category

In a material category you define the quantity of material to be picked as a preventive measure in
addition to the production requirements to avoid the foreseeable reordering of material from the
warehouse.
Creating a material category

1. Switch within Master Data in the Material Manager to the Material Category dialog.
2. Click Create New Category.
3. Enter the Name of the new material category.
4. Enter the Calculated Scrap (in %).
5. Enter the assumed additional consumption.
This option is disabled by default and should only be enabled within the project environment in the
case of special requirements.
6. Enter the minimum number of components in Re-Storage Quantity that a packaging unit must
contain so that it can be transported back to the warehouse.
7. Click OK.
2.2.3 Material Class

Material classes are used for classifying materials according to your own search or sort criteria, such as
usage or priorities, which are used in your production environment.
Creating a material class

1. Switch within Master Data in the Material Manager to the Material Class dialog.
2. Click Create new Material Class.
3. Enter the ID of the new material class.
4. Enter the ID of the group to which this material class is to be assigned.
You can also select the group name from the list of existing IDs.
5. Enter a description for the material class.
6. Click OK.
2.2.4 Manufacturer
Manufacturer or supplier of materials
There is a label on the packaging or reel in which materials are delivered featuring barcodes, which
contain coded information about the materials being delivered. These barcodes contain additional
manufacturer-specific prefixes, that are not evaluated by the Material Manager and therefore need to be
removed automatically during scanning when the materials are received.
The prefix contained in the barcode that later needs to be removed is saved in the manufacturer's
master data for each barcode pattern in addition to the manufacturer name.

2 Workflows
Creating manufacturer data

1. Switch within Master Data in the Material Manager to the Manufacturer dialog.
2. Click Create Manufacturer.
3. Enter the name of the new manufacturer.
4. In the fields for the individual barcode patterns, enter the prefixes that need to be removed
automatically during scanning when the materials are received.
5. If the manufacturer uses 2D barcodes, select the rule from the Barcode Type drop-down list to be
used for analyzing any additional 2D barcodes that appear on the label.
6. Click OK.
2.3 Receiving incoming materials

All incoming materials and material packaging units are identified by a scanner when they are received
and assigned to an existing material definition in the system. Both simple barcodes and 2D barcodes
can be used for this procedure.
In order to track materials in the system, a unique packaging unit ID is assigned to each packaging unit
and printed on a label, which is then stuck on the packaging unit.
As soon as the material has been identified, it exists in the system - together with the attributes entered -
and can be tracked throughout the entire production process and moved within the identification points
(storage locations).
Identify Incoming Material

1. Switch within the Material Manager to the Material Receipt - Identify Incoming Material dialog (see
Identify Incoming Material and Print Labels on page 109).
2. Scan the barcodes that are on the material, or enter the data using the keyboard.
3. Check whether the data matches the supplier data.
4. Correct any differences, if necessary.
5. Click Book.
The packaging unit data is saved in the system and the new labels for the packaging unit are printed.
6. Stick the label on the relevant packaging unit.
Importing packaging unit data

If you have your own system for identifying material and for creating unique IDs on the packaging units,
you can import the data you have created to the Material Manager via the B2MML interface. Your
ASMPT contact person can provide you with more information and assistance on how to proceed with
this.
If you are using the Setup Center import function, it can be configured so that the data imported into the
Setup Center is forwarded automatically to the Material Manager. All the packaging unit data created in
the Setup Center is transferred automatically to the Material Manager. Any master data that may be
required to do so is also created automatically.

2 Workflows
To automatically transfer all packaging unit data created in the Setup Center to the Material Manager:
and higher, on the correspoSnding tile.

2. In the Application Settings area, select the WORKS Material Manager application and then select
Global Settings.
3. Select the Incoming tab.
4. In the Incoming Module area, enable the Automatically import packaging units created in Setup
Center option. Enable the displayed option Import packaging units from Setup Center to a specific
location toselect a location for the packaging units.
Existing material data from the Setup Center can be imported to the Material Manager using the
SetupCenter Database Export tool included on the OIB CD.

2 Workflows
2.4 Storing materials

When materials are stored they are booked to a specific delivery location.
The steps involved in storing materials differ according to the type of storage unit.
Manual storage / high bay racking

In the case of high bay racking, a distinction is made between the following:
l Chaotic storage
In a chaotic storage system, each material can be stored in any storage bin.
This requires each storage bin to have a unique storage bin ID (barcode). To do this, the storage bins
must be created in the Material Manager in the Configuration - Warehouse dialog (see Warehouse
on page 210).
Procedure
1. On the PDA, open the Material Receipt dialog and, under Warehouse, select the storage zone in
which you want to store the packaging unit.
2. Check whether the storage bin size is the same size as the packaging unit or larger.
3. Scan the barcode of the P.Unit, or enter the packaging unit ID using the keyboard.
4. Scan the barcode of the Storage Bin, or enter the storage bin ID using the keyboard.
The packaging unit is booked into the storage bin.
5. Place the packaging unit in the storage bin.
l Fixed storage rule
In a fixed storage rule, a specific storage bin is allocated to a material.
Note
No storage bin monitoring
The system does not carry out a check as to whether a packaging unit really has been
placed correctly in a specific storage bin.
Procedure
1. Select the location on the PDA where you want to store the packaging unit in Warehouse in the
Manual Storage dialog.
2. Place the packaging unit in the allocated storage bin.
Storing materials in a tower system

1. Place the packaging unit to be stored in the tower's storage tray.
2. Tap the storage button.
If the packaging unit is stored correctly, the tower reports this to the Material Manager and the packaging
unit is moved to the new storage unit.
If the packaging unit is not stored successfully, for instance, because the packaging unit is too thick or
the barcode could not be read, the packaging unit is returned and the packaging unit is not moved.
Storing materials in a Kardex / Megamat or Hänel system

Store materials in a paternoster controlled by Kardex PowerPick or managed by Hänel.

2 Workflows
1. On the PDA, open the Material Receipt dialog and, under Warehouse, select Kardex or Hänel.
The paternoster prepares a suitable tray and indicates the storage bin to be used using a laser
pointer.
If the packaging unit is stored correctly, the paternoster reports this to the Material Manager and the
packaging unit is moved to the new storage unit.
2.4.1 Automatically tear down when charging lots

When packaging units that are returned from production are placed back in storage, it can happen that
the packaging unit has the status setup and cannot be stored.
Examples of possible causes:
l The packaging unit was withdrawn manually and the status of packaging unit was not reset from
setup to available.
l The message from the Setup Center to the effect that a material was torn down was not received in
the Material Manager.
To store this material in a storage location, you can make settings in the Factory Explorer OIB module
so that the status of these packaging units is automatically reset from SetUp to Available.
Note
Only packaging units that are set up offline on feed modules can be torn down automatically.
This is not possible for packaging units that are currently set up on a table or on the line.

2 Workflows

2. In the Application Settings - Material Manager tree structure, select Global Settings.
3. Click on the Packaging Unit Management tab.
4. Select the relevant setting in the Automatically tear down when charging lots drop-down list.
The individual options have the following effects:
Disabled
An attempt to return a packaging unit with the setup status to storage triggers an error message.
The status of the packaging unit must be reset from setup to available in Material Management -
Packaging Units - Edit Packaging Units (see above).
The same behavior is also valid for material clearing.
Only in Setup Center
An attempt to return a packaging unit with the setup status causes the Material Manager to attempt
to tear down the packaging unit in the Setup Center. The status of the packaging unit is automatically
reset to available by the Setup Center.
In Setup Center and external systems
An attempt to store a packaging unit with the status setup causes the Material Manager to attempt to
tear down the packaging unit in the Setup Center. The status of the packaging unit is automatically
reset to available in the Material Manager. There is no communication with the external system.

2 Workflows
Resetting the status manually:

First use the packaging unit editor in the Setup Center to check that the packaging unit is not actually
assigned to a feeder module. If the packaging unit is assigned to a feeder module, it must be torn down
in the Setup Center.
If the packaging unit is not assigned to a feeder module, the status of the packaging unit can also be
corrected manually in the Material Manager (see also Edit Packaging Unit on page 171).
1. Using Material Management in the Material Manager, switch to the Packaging Unit dialog.
2. Select the packaging unit in question in the table.
3. Click Edit Packaging Unit.
4. Change the status of the packaging unit from setup back to available.
5. Click OK.
6. Return to the packaging unit to storage again.
2.4.2 Automatic booking of packaging units to storage bins

If a material number is assigned in the master data to a storage bin, Material Manager books the
packaging unit to be stored during the material receipt workflow in the following cases automatically into
the configured storage bin:
l Material Manager app: Automatic storage
l User interface Web: Material Receipt
l A packaging unit is torn down in Setup Center
If the capacity of the preferred storage bin is exhausted, the next configured storage bin is determined.
Material reception is rejected if
l it is specified in the material master data of the packaging unit that the brightness class is required
and this is not set in the packaging unit.
l storage is prohibited for blocked packaging unitd in in the Central Settings menu under Global
Settings on the Packaging Unit Management tab.
l The packaging unit is still intended for other uses (MSA processes).
The packaging unit is not booked to the storage bin, but remains on the corresponding storage unit if
l the size of the packaging unit does not correspond to the size assigned in the storage bin.
l no more free storage bin capacities is available.
l the storage bin is locked.
Note
l MSD material remains on the picking place of the storage unit, when a packaging unit
is torn down with Setup Center.
l If a parking space is defined in the storage zone and this is configured in such a way
that packaging units are to be booked there during teardown, this logic is overridden
by the automatic storage bin booking.
Note
When a packaging unit is torn down with Setup Center, this packaging unit is
automatically booked into the corresponding storage bin. Here it must be checked
whether this actually corresponds to the customer's use case.

2 Workflows
2.5 Parking a set up table

To optimize access to set up packaging units and to store setups temporarily, it is possible to park set up
tables at a storage unit or in a parking position in the storage unit.
Note
Requirements
Tables can only be parked in a storage unit that is defined as a Parking Place type in the
Factory Explorer OIB module.
If a table is to be parked in a parking position within a storage unit of the Parking Place type,
the parking position must be defined as a storage bin in the storage unit.
Enable the Automatically book on feeder removed option if the packaging units set up on the
table are to be booked to the storage unit automatically.
Enable the Automatically book on teardown option if packaging units are to be booked to the
storage unit after tear down.
Enable the Material Picking Allowed option if the packaging units set up on the parked table
are also to be available for other production runs when creating pick lists.
Note
l If one of the options for "Automatically book" is enabled, the other two
options should not be enabled.
l Within a storage zone, an "Automatically book" option may be enabled at a
maximum of one storage unit.
1. Place the set up table at a storage unit of the Parking Place type or in a parking position.
2. Scan the barcode of the table, or enter the table ID in Table using the keyboard.
3. Scan the barcode of the storage unit or storage bin, or enter the name of the storage unit or storage
bin (parking position) using the keyboard.
l The rules for MSD safety are observed.
l The state of the packaging unit does not change.

2 Workflows
2.6 Finding a set up table

To find a set up table, proceed as follows:
1. Switch to the Material Management - Packaging Unit dialog.
2. Set the following filter criteria in the Active filter area:
Field: Table
Condition: =
Value: <Table ID> when searching for a specific table.
"TID*" when searching for all known tables.
3. Start the search.

2 Workflows
2.7 Automatic reordering (KANBAN control)

Material Manager helps you to provide materials to the storage and consumption location in a timely
manner based on actual consumption (Kanban method).
The objective of this procedure is to control the supply of materials in the most cost-effective way
possible using a multi-level distribution chain. Withdrawals from the relevant interim storage zones and
the replenishment of these same storage zones occur asynchronously.
The automatic reordering of materials is controlled using replenishment thresholds (threshold values),
which can be defined by the user for each interim storage zone and material. You use the replenishment
threshold rules to specify when and in which quantity the stock levels of the individual materials are to be
replenished automatically.
If the inventory level of a material drops below the report inventory level, i.e. the defined minimum
inventory level, this material is automatically reordered from the higher-level interim storage zone,
provided that another order for a sufficient quantity is not pending. The material is ordered in the defined
minimum quantity. If the minimum delivery quantity is not sufficient to reach the planned inventory level
for the material, multiple quantities must be ordered.
When the material ordered arrives at the storage unit to be supplied, the value entered under
Requested Quantity is reduced by the delivery quantity. A purchase order is deemed to be complete
when the requested quantity has been fully delivered.
Figure 2 - 6: Supply chain diagram

2 Workflows
Procedure
Note
Defining properties of the factory layout in the OIB
The properties of the individual elements of the factory layout (storage zones, production
lines etc.) are defined in the OIB. You can find a description of how to call up the
corresponding dialogs in section Editing the properties of the Factory Layout on page 22.
To guarantee an automatic supply chain workflow, the organizational conditions set out below must be
fulfilled.
l The supply storage zones must be arranged in a hierarchical structure. (see figure)
Materials are passed on to the subordinate supply storage zones in a "top-down" direction.
The highest level in the distribution chain may be an internal main storage zone or an external
supplier system.
You define the supply storage zones in OIB. Here you also define the higher-level supply storage
zone that is to supply a storage zone.
Note
Avoiding circular reordering
When planning your supply storage zones, make sure that materials are always
reordered from a higher-level storage zone in a cascading fashion.
l Each production line should have a local supply storage zone defined for it, from which the material is
to be withdrawn for immediate consumption.
You define the production lines in OIB. Here you also define the supply storage zone that is to supply
the production line.
l For each individual supply storage zone, you must define the replenishment thresholds (threshold
values) at which materials are to be reordered and the quantities in which they are to be reordered.
You define the reorder thresholds in Configuration - Storage location - Display reorder threshold in
the Edit reorder threshold dialog (see Showing a replenishment threshold on page 212 and Creating
/ Editing a replenishment threshold (details) on page 214).
l Automatic reordering must be enabled in OIB - Factory Explorer. For a description, see Enabling
automatic reordering on page 58.

2 Workflows
Example of automatic reordering
Figure 2 - 7: Automatic reordering diagram
This diagram shows a supply chain for 3 production lines.

The red figures and arrow indicate the material reorders, while the green figures and arrows indicate the
material deliveries.
The ? symbol indicates the question of whether a replenishment threshold has been exceeded, in which
case automatic reordering is triggered.
As a result of consumption by the production line or due to the picking of material, the stock level in a
storage zone is reduced. The system checks whether the replenishment threshold defined for the
material has been exceeded. If it has, this material is automatically requested from the storage zone
defined for reordering in the defined quantity (minimum quantity + X).
The higher-level storage zone picks the requested material and, as a result, the stock level in this
storage zone is in turn reduced. This mechanism therefore continues throughout the entire supply chain
from bottom to top.

2 Workflows
2.7.1 Enabling automatic reordering
Note
Alternative components
Splice chains are only included in the calculations for automatic reordering if all the materials
they contain are of the same type.
Splice chains consisting of various components are ignored in the calculations for automatic
reordering.
To enable automatic reordering in OIB/Factory Explorer:
Start the WORKS Studio by double-clicking on the WORKS Studio icon on your Desktop or,
in Windows 8 and higher, on the corresponding tile.

Global Settings.
3. Select the Miscellaneous tab.
4. In the Material Reorder area, enable the Enable automatic reorder option.

2 Workflows
5. In the Application Settings - WORKS Material Manager, mark the entry Non-inheritable Factory
Layout Settings.
6. Select the storage zone you want to configure in the Factory Layout.
7. In the Material Flow area, you select the Supply Storage Zone from which the material is to be
ordered.
8. If the supply storage zone is managed by the Material Manager, enable the Managed by WORKS
Material Manager option.
9. In the Material reorder area, enable the Allow automatic / manual material reorder from internal
storage location option.
10. In Replenishment Aggregation Period, configure the time period in which reorders triggered
manually or by falling below a replenishment threshold are to be collected.
Maximum value: 24 hours
Format: HH.MM.SS
If "00.00.00" is configured as the period, the collection of reorders is disabled. All reorders are
executed directly.
If you enable the Non replenishment reorders always on separate material requirement list option,
reorders triggered manually are executed directly and not together with the reorders collected by
falling below replenishment thresholds.
If this option is disabled, reorders triggered manually are added to a common material requirements
list together with reorders triggered by falling below replenishment thresholds.
11. In Storage Type, select the Connection Type you want to use to communicate with the supply
storage zone.
If the supply storage zone is managed by the Material Manager, select the Internal Storage (No
Connection) option. In this case, the input box remains blank. When ordering, a material
requirements list is created and the material is then picked.

2 Workflows
If the supply storage zone is managed by another system, not by the Material Manager, select one of
the following options. Enter supplementary communication data under Connection Parameters
depending on the selected Connection Type.
l External Storage Location (Connected by Network (web service)): The external system is
accessed via a web service.
In this case, enter the URL of the web service under Connection Parameters.
l External Storage Location (Connected by File System (CSV)): The external system reads the
order data from a CSV-format file located in a directory on the computer where the Material
Manager Application Server is installed, and triggers supply of the ordered material.
In this case, enter the path to the directory where the CSV files are to be stored under Connection
Parameters.
2.7.2 Automatically print reorder materials requirement list

To inform the operators that a reorder has to be processed, you can enable automatic printing of the
reorder materials requirement list belonging to the reorder. This function must be activated using the
configuration in the OIB / Factory Explorer global settings.
Only lists generated by a reorder are printed. Other lists cannot be automatically printed.
To enable automatic printing of reorder materials requirement lists:

2 Workflows

Global Settings.
3. Select the Miscellaneous tab.
4. In the Material Requirements List - PDA area, select the Print material requirements list option.
2.8 Configuring supply and reorder rules

For supplying a production line, you can set up rules for the supply storage zone and the reorder storage
zone to be used to supply the relevant line.
You can assign a priority to each of these rules to determine the order in which the rules are to be
evaluated. The priorities are displayed in descending order from top to bottom in the list in the dialog.
The rules are checked according to their priority until a rule is applicable. The storage zone assigned in
the relevant rule is then used as the supply or reorder storage zone.
Prerequisite: If you want to use rule-based determination, select the Use rules to determine supply or
reorder storage zone option for the relevant production line.
To configure the rules for supplying a production line:
Start the WORKS Studio by double-clicking on the WORKS Studio icon on your Desktop or,
in Windows 8 and higher, on the corresponding tile.

2 Workflows

Non-inheritable Factory Layout Settings.
3. Select the production line you want to configure under Factory Layout.
4. In the Material Flow area, select the Use rules to determine supply or reorder storage zone option.
You can now set the rules for the supply storage zone and/or reorder storage zone to be used.
The process is the same for both.
5. Under Rule set to edit set whether you want to set the rule for a supply storage zone or a reorder
storage zone.
6. Under Selected row specify the row for the rule you want to edit.
7. Under Rule type select the differentiating criterion to be used.
8. For Station Name, Location, Material ID and Regular Expression rule types only
Under Rule value enter the value or the name to compare with when evaluating the rule.
9. Under Storage zone enter the name of the storage zone from which the material is to be obtained.
For the Fallback rule type, set the supply storage zone / reorder storage zone from which the
material is to be supplied if there is no match for any of the other specified rules.

2 Workflows
2.9 Picking material

Note
For general information about the EDM SIPLACE Pro Deployment Scenarios, refer to article
no. 00198496-xx in the "OIB Settings - EDM Scenarios" manual.
For general information about the EDM SIPLACE Pro Deployment Scenarios, refer to article no.
00198496-xx in the "OIB Settings - EDM Scenarios" manual.
2.9.1 Setting creation options for material requirements lists

When material requirements lists are created, the settings defined in the WORKS Studio - Factory
Explorer are used. These settings must be made here for each line separately.


2 Workflows

2. In the Application settings - WORKS Material Manager tree structure, mark the entry Inheritable
3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, mark the line for which you want to define the settings for
creating the material requirements lists.
4. Choose the settings you want in the area indicated.
With these settings, you can define before creating the material requirements lists whether they are to be
split up to match the various usage scenarios, e.g.,
l Separate material requirements lists for refill list
l Location-oriented material requirements lists for initial setup, refill and reordered material
l Special material requirements lists for MSD material.
If you want to display or change the preset values in the Material Manager before creating a material
requirements list, enable the Change Creation Options checkbox in the footer at the bottom of the Edit
Material Requirements Listdialog. The creation options for material requirements lists are then also
displayed in lower area of the dialog and can be changed temporarily. For a description of the creation
options see Creating / Editing a material requirements list (details) on page 128.

2 Workflows
2.9.2 Picking material for a SIPLACE Pro setup

A SIPLACE Pro setup list contains information that tells you which materials are needed for a certain
setup. Precisely one packaging unit is requested for each material contained in the setup. The Material
Manager determines the required materials from the setup and generates a material requirements list
from this. Precisely one packaging unit of the required material is entered in the material requirements
list per track.
When the actual picking process is started on the PDA, the material requirements list is transferred to
one or more pick lists that contain the details on the specific reels required. When calculating the pick
lists, the system takes into account the properties of the storage zone in relation to the picking strategy
and the picking sort order.
1. Switch within Material Requirement to the Material Requirement List dialog.
2. Click Create New List.
The dialog for creating a material requirements list is displayed.
3. First select a production line in Target Location where the materials are to be delivered.
4. Select the Supply Storage Zone from which the material is to be ordered.
5. Under List Type, select whether the material is an Initial List or a Refill List.
6. Click Import Setup List.
The dialog for creating a material requirements list using data from SIPLACE Pro setup lists is
displayed.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the available setups for the various production
lines.
7. Click the setup in the tree structure from which you want to create a material requirements list.
All components in the selected setup are displayed in the table on the right.
8. Now select the required data volume.
Click one of the buttons described below to start creating the material requirements list immediately.
l If you want to create a material requirements list including fixed components, click Create
Complete.
If you want to create a material requirements list that does not include fixed components, click
Create Without Fixed Components.
The Material Manager determines whether a material is fixed from SIPLACE Pro.
l If the list contains components that do not exist in the Material Manager, you can either create a
material requirements list without these components or cancel the operation.
If you are creating a new material requirements list, this is then displayed in the Material Requirement
List dialog.
The further procedure for picking is described in Picking material in the main stock location (processing
the material requirements list) on page 72.

2 Workflows
2.9.3 Picking material for a SIPLACE Pro production schedule

The procedure for picking materials for a production schedule is similar to the picking procedure for a
setup. For a production schedule, however, the exact number of required components is defined for
each lot it contains. The Material Manager can use this data to determine the exact material
requirements. The actual number of components required is therefore entered in the material
requirements list. The requested material is requested in the precise quantities needed for processing
the selected production schedule or the selected lot.
6. Click Import from Production Schedule.
The dialog for creating a material requirements list using data from SIPLACE Pro production
schedules is displayed.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the available production schedules for the various
production lines.
7. Click the production schedule in the tree structure for which you want to create a material
requirements list.
The tree structure displays all the lots contained in the selected production schedule. The table on
the right shows all the components contained in these lots.
You can now choose whether to process all lots in the production schedule or only individual lots.
8. Select the contents from which you want to create a material requirements list.
9. Click Show Components.
The table on the right is refreshed according to your selection.
10. If you want to include the alternate tracks in the material requirements lists, enable the Include Spare
Tracks option.
Complete.
The selected data is transferred to the material requirements list and then displayed in the Material
Requirement List dialog. You then have the option to print a missing parts list in this dialog.

2 Workflows
2.9.4 Picking material for a SIPLACE Pro job

The procedure for picking materials for a job is similar to the picking procedure for a production
schedule. Similar to a production schedule, the exact number of required components is defined for a
job for each lot it contains. The Material Manager can use this data to determine the exact material
requirements. The actual number of components required is therefore entered in the material
requirements list. The requested material is requested in the precise quantities needed for processing
the selected job or the selected lot.
6. Click Import from Job.
The dialog for creating a material requirements list using data from SIPLACE Pro jobs is displayed.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the available jobs for the various production lines.
7. Click the job in the tree structure for which you want to create a material requirements list.
The tree structure displays all the lots contained in the selected job. The table on the right shows all
the components contained in these lots.
You can now choose whether to process all lots in the job or only individual lots.
8. Select the contents from which you want to create a material requirements list.
The table on the right is refreshed according to your selection.
Tracks option.
Complete.
Requirement List dialog.

2 Workflows
2.9.5 Creating a material requirements list manually

This function allows you to reorder individual materials. If you want to reorder several materials, the
Import from File function may be better suited to your purpose.
It is also possible to request an exact number of components for a material. In this case, select Pick
Exact List in List Type. The Number of Components field is displayed below the table instead of the
Number of Packaging Units field. Enter the number of required components in this field. The Change
creation options option is not available in this case.
1. First select the Target Location where the materials are to be delivered. When editing an existing
material requirements list, you cannot change the Target Location.
Under Supply Storage Zone, the system displays the preset storage zone from which the materials
are ordered by default for the selected target location.
2. If you want to order the material from a storage zone other than the preset storage zone, you can
select this under Supply Storage Zone.
3. In List Type, select whether the material is an Initial List, a Refill List, or a Pick Exact List.
4. Enter the Part Number of the required material.
5. Press the ENTER key.
6. For the Initial List or Refill List list type, enter the required Number of Packaging Units.
For the Pick Exact List list type, enter the required Number of Components.
7. Press the ENTER key, or click Add.
When creating a new material requirements list, the list name is made up of the target location and
the current sequential number. The name is displayed in List ID at the top of the dialog.
The table below displays the list contents.
To add other items to the material requirements list, repeat steps 2 to 5.
To remove one or more items from the material requirements list, select the item(s) in the first column
of the table, and click Delete Item.
All selected items are deleted from the material requirements list.
Note
Approval
Material requirements lists created manually must then be approved in the overview
(Material Requirement List dialog).
Note
If you create a material requirements list manually, the system checks whether a material
requirements list already exists for the selected Target Location. If this is the case, items are
added to the existing material requirements list when you click Add, and the list is then
displayed for editing in the table.

2 Workflows
2.9.6 Enable automatic level 2 optimization

Once lots have been created and optimized in SIPLACE Pro (at least Level 2 optimization), Material
Manager can read and process this data.
If these lots are changed after optimization in SIPLACE Pro, they need to be optimized again.
To ensure that the lots can still be read by Material Manager, you have the option of automatically
initiating an optimization operation (Level 2) using Material Manager. To do this, enable the Perform
Automatic Level 2 Optimization As Required option on the Optimization tab under Central Settings in
the FactoryExplorer OIB module in WORKS Studio.


2 Workflows

2. Select the SIPLACE Pro application on the left-hand side in the Application Settings area and then
select General.
3. Click the Optimization tab on the right-hand side under Properties.
4. To use the optimization, enable the Perform Automatic Level 2 Optimization As Required option.
2.9.7 Importing data for material picking from a file

In order to specifically create a material requirements list for certain materials, you can collect the
requirements data in a file and then import all this data together in a single step.
In this dialog, you select the prepared file from which you want to create a material requirements list.
Procedure
1. Prepare the file from which you want to import the material requirements data in accordance with
your requirements (see Creating an import file on page 102).
4. Under Target Location, select a production line or a storage zone to which the materials are to be
delivered.
7. Click Import from File.
The dialog for importing from a file is displayed.
8. Click Browse.
9. Navigate to the directory where the import file is stored.
10. Select the file you want to import.
11. Click Import.
A material requirements list is created from the data contained in the selected file, and this list is then
displayed in the Material Requirements List dialog.

2 Workflows
If the import fails, the Open log file button is displayed, which allows you to open or save the log file
describing the reason for the import error.

2 Workflows
2.9.8 Picking MSD material separately

To reduce the MSD material open time, it is advisable in most cases to pick MSD material separately at
the appropriate time.
To use the function for picking MSD material separately, the Pick MSD material to this location
separately option must have been enabled in Central Settings in the definition of the respective storage
zone in the OIB. If this option is enabled, MSD materials are grouped in a separate, cross-table material
requirements list so that the MSD materials are only picked shortly before the start of the production run.
Note
Reorder Missing Parts
If this function is enabled and missing parts are to be calculated for purposes of reordering,
these must be calculated both for the "normal" material requirements list (without MSD
materials) and for the MSD material requirements list.
Note
Possible delays
As picking for the MSD material requirements list does not start until later, MSD parts may
sometimes be missing as they have been consumed elsewhere in the meantime and
production cannot therefore begin straightaway.
2.9.9 Picking material in the main stock location (processing the material requirements
list)
Note
Picking locked material
In OIB - Factory Explorer you can use the Packaging Unit Management tab in the Central
Settings to specify whether or not locked material can be picked (see Packaging Unit
Management tab on page 338).
Note
Requirement:
In order to pick materials, each storage zone needs exactly one storage unit of the
PickingPlace type to which the material can be transported during picking.
The material requirements list is transferred to one or more pick lists that contain all the necessary
details on the particular materials required. When calculating the pick lists, the system takes into account
the picking strategy and picking sort order configured for the storage zone.
1. Switch to the Picklist Processing application on your PDA.
2. Select a material requirements list.
3. Select a storage unit and start the picking process.
The PDA guides you through the storage zone (storage unit).
4. Work your way through the individual items in the pick list.
Pick the packaging units included on the list and then bring them to the target location. If picking is
successful, the picked material is booked to this storage unit.
You can skip any packaging units in the list that you cannot find. In this case, attempts are made to
find this packaging unit later on in a different storage unit.

2 Workflows
5. When you have worked your way through to the end of a pick list for a storage unit, select the next
storage unit, and resume the picking process.
Pick list processing is finished when you have processed all the storage units defined for this pick list
completely.
Picking material from a tower

The material requirements list is sent from the Material Manager to the tower for picking.
The tower then picks the packaging units one at a time in the order entered in the pick list.
l Automatic processing of pick lists
For each storage location of the ASM Material Tower type you can use the OIB in the Central
Settings to specify the list types for which processing of the pick list is to be automatically started in
the Autostart Options section of the storage location properties.
o If the autostart option is enabled for a list type, processing of the pick list starts as soon as it has
been approved by Material Manager. It is not then necessary for the operator to start the picking
process on the PDA.
If insufficient material is available, missing components lists are generated automatically and sent
to the assigned supply storage zone.
o If the autostart option is not enabled for a list type, the picking process for a pick list of this type
l Speeding up picking
If several towers combine to form a tower cluster, for each storage location you can use OIB in the
Central Settings to set the picking speed for the different list types under Boost Material Tower
Picking Speed in the storage location properties.
o If the option for accelerated picking is enabled for a list type, when picking the packaging units
from all towers in the tower cluster are picked in parallel. When picking, the packaging units are
issued as soon as a free removal bin is registered by the tower cluster. Parallel picking
accelerates the picking process as several towers in the tower cluster are working at the same
time.
Disadvantage: The picking order of the packaging units does not correspond to the order entered
in the pick list and the packaging units have to be sorted subsequently.
o If the option for accelerated picking is not enabled for a list type, when picking the subsequent
packaging unit is only issued when the previous packaging unit has been removed from the issue
chute. This means that the packaging units are issued in the order entered in the pick list.
Disadvantage: Picking takes longer as with this setting only one tower in the tower cluster is
working at a time.

2 Workflows
Picking material from an Active Feeder Storage

The material requirements list is sent from the Material Manager to the Active Feeder Storage for
picking.
Note
The Active Feeder Storage is managed by a 3rd party module, which is not part of Material
Manager.
Active Feeder Stand cannot be used in setup areas managed by the Material Setup
Assistant (MSA).
l Automatic processing of pick lists

For each storage unit of the Active Feeder Storage type, you can use the Autostart Options section
of the storage unit properties in the Central Settings of OIB to configure the list types for which
processing of the pick list is to be started automatically.
o If the autostart option is enabled for a list type, processing of the pick list starts as soon as it has
been approved by Material Manager. It is not then necessary for the operator to start the picking
process on the PDA.
If insufficient material is available, missing components lists are generated automatically and sent
to the assigned supply storage zone.
o If the autostart option is not enabled for a list type, the picking process for a pick list of this type
Picking material from high bay racking

The PDA guides you from storage bin to storage bin.
1. Remove the packaging unit from the storage bin displayed on the PDA.
2. Scan the packaging unit barcode to confirm the withdrawal.
By scanning the packaging unit you confirm that you have removed the correct packaging unit.
For pick lists of the Pick Exact List type only, in other words, when picking a defined number of
components:
3. Remove the number of components displayed on the PDA from the scanned packaging unit.
4. Confirm the display on the PDA. The Material Manager reduces the packaging unit quantity by the
number of components removed.
5. Return the packaging unit to the location from which you removed it.

2 Workflows
Picking material from a Kardex/Megamat system

If you are guided by the PDA when picking on a Kardex/Megamat system, proceed as follows:
l The pick list is sent from the Material Manager to the paternoster.
l The pick list is then started according to the selection made in PowerPick.
l The paternoster moves to the first tray according to the route optimization configured in PowerPick
and indicates the packaging unit to be removed using a laser pointer.
1. Remove the packaging unit.

2. Scan the packaging unit barcode to confirm the withdrawal.
components:
There are two modes that you can select in the Central Settings in the OIB.
l Mode 1: Process each packaging unit individually
4. Confirm the display on the PDA. The Material Manager reduces the packaging unit quantity by
the number of components removed.
5. Place the packaging unit back into the storage unit at the corresponding location.
l Mode 2: Process all packaging units at once
4. Confirm the display on the PDA. The Material Manager reduces the packaging unit quantity by
the number of components removed and the packaging unit is booked to the picking place of the
storage zone.
5. The packaging unit must then be returned to the storage unit using the Material Receipt dialog.
Note
Reversal
If you select a different pick list during processing before processing the current pick list
completely, the Material Manager sends a reversal notification to the PowerPick.
Picking material from a Hänel system

The procedure is the same as for Kardex/Megamat systems. The only difference is that the Hänel
system does not recognize reversals. Thus, if pick list processing is interrupted, the pick list needs to be
deleted manually in the Hänel system.

2 Workflows
2.9.10 Picking strategy and picking sort order
Note
The picking strategy ignores storage units of the Picking Place and Baking type. Material in
these storage units is ignored when processing material requirements lists.
Picking Strategy
To determine the packaging units to be picked, the Material Manager uses an equipment sequence /
FIFO strategy.
You can configure the settings separately for each storage zone of the area in which the FIFO (First In
First Out) picking strategy is to be used in Central Settings in the OIB.
Storage Zone FIFO
FIFO is applied to the entire storage zone, in other words, across all the storage units contained
within it.
Storage Unit FIFO
FIFO is applied within each of the individual storage units only.
In turn, the storage units are processed sequentially one after the other.
Picking Sort Order

The Material Manager uses different picking sort orders during picking depending on the technical
capabilities of the storage type:
l KARDEX / Hänel:
The requested packaging units must be picked exactly. Picking can, however, take place in any
order.
l Material Tower:
The tower picks the material in the order specified by the Material Manager.
l ROYONIC: (discontinued file interface)
Picking is not monitored by the Material Manager; ROYONIC triggers picking by means of
asynchronous processing. When picking is completed, ROYONIC reports this to the Material
Manager.
The newer versions of the ROYONIC Tower also support the Tower software and pick the
material in the order specified by the Material Manager.
l Other types of storage:
The order of the packaging units is specified by the Material Manager during picking; individual
items cannot be skipped. Other locations are searched for any materials that are not found.
Any other packaging unit that is available and has the same or an alternative part number can be
picked. The permitted alternative part numbers are shown in the relevant material reorder in the
Material Requirements List dialog.

2 Workflows
2.9.11 Supply Scenarios

In Material Manager, a line can be supplied with material in two different ways:
l By scheduled supply deliveries from a storage location (initial setup and refill material)
l By ad hoc reordering requests from the line or an operator at the PDA
Supply deliveries
Supply deliveries are typically planned before the start of production and delivered to the production line.
The material for the initial setup is delivered to the setup area of a line, where it is used to set up the
component tables. The set up component tables are then brought to the line.
The refill material is delivered to the line or to a storage location (e.g. an Material Tower). During
production, this material is used to replenish the initial setup and is spliced to the corresponding
packaging units already present on the line.
Reorder
Reorder material is not scheduled and is requested while production is ongoing if it is determined on the
line or by an operator at the PDA that the originally planned quantity of material is not sufficient to allow
production to be completed, e.g., if the production run number has suddenly been raised.
In this context, material transport is not necessarily carried out in a single stage from a storage location
to a line; it can also be interlinked to include several storage locations. This makes it possible to
configure supply scenarios of any degree of complexity (see also Automatic reordering (KANBAN
control) on page 55).
Recommended supply scenarios

As standard, we recommend one of the following three scenarios for the supply of material:
1. Supply storage location for the line (standard)

The line is supplied with material for initial setup and with refill
material entirely from a supply storage zone adjacent to production
(Storage Zone 1). Material that is not available is delivered to this
storage location. When the material is picked, the FIFO principle is
applied.
2. Reorder storage zone

2 Workflows
The line is supplied from 2 different storage locations.

A storage location adjacent to production (Storage Zone 1) supplies
the line with material for initial setup and refill material. The refill
material can also be placed in a second, intermediate storage
location if there is not enough room for it on the line. The refill
material is then requested by the line for subsequent splicing.
The reorder storage location (Reorder Storage Zone 2) supplies the
line with reordered material. This can be helpful if, for example, the
reorder storage location is significantly closer to production than the
supply storage location but does not have enough capacity to
function as a supply storage location. If the requested reorder
material is not present in the reorder storage location, this material is
ordered from the supply storage location closest to production.
The reorder storage location can be supplied with material from the
supply storage location by means of Kanban control, e.g. if no refill
material has been picked.
When the material is picked, the FIFO principle is applied in both
storage locations.
3. Intermediate storage location for refill material
The line is supplied from 2 different storage locations.
A storage location adjacent to production (Storage Zone 1) supplies
the line with material for initial setup. When the material is picked,
the FIFO rule is applied.
The refill material is delivered to a refill storage location
(Intermediate Storage Zone 3, e.g., a Material Tower) which has
been configured as an intermediate storage location.
The special feature of this is that when the material is placed in an
intermediate storage location the setup information is retained, and
the material is reserved for a specific setup.
When a refill request is made, only the material that is reserved for a
setup is picked. The FIFO principle is not applied in this case
because actual packaging units have already been reserved as refill
packaging units.
Note:
In order to be able to use a storage location as an intermediate
storage location, the Use as intermediate storage location for refill
reels must have been enabled in Central Settings in the OIB. For a
detailed description of configuring and working with an intermediate
storage location, see Intermediate storage on page 79.
Legend:
1. Supply from a supply storage location
2.Supply from the refill storage location

2 Workflows
2.9.12 Intermediate storage

You can use storage zones adjacent to the line as intermediate storage for storing large quantities of
refill material for rapid access or to temporarily store material that has already been picked for a specific
setup.
Unlike normal storage zones, the packaging units stored here do not lose their setup information and are
each reserved for a specific setup.
Requirements
As a rule, towers or small storage units, which are located within a storage zone, are used as
intermediate storage. The Storage managed by WORKS Material Manager option must have been
enabled in Central Settings for the definition of this storage zone in the OIB.
To ensure that the setup information for the packaging unit is not lost when it is placed in storage, the
Use as intermediate storage for refill reels option must have been enabled in Central Settings for the
definition of this storage zone in the OIB. If a material is used up on the line and reordered, the
designated refill reel is picked from the intermediate storage.
If no reserved packaging units are available in the intermediate storage for the request from the line, the
request is forwarded to the supply storage zone. If the Remove missing parts from material
requirement list option is enabled in the storage zone definition in WORKS Studio, the packaging units
are removed from the current list.
By default, a separate material requirements list is created for each component table for the initial list.
For the refill list, you can configure the system so that all refill packaging units in a large material
requirements list are condensed to a single refill list. For this, the Create location wise refill lists for this
location option must have been disabled in Central Settings for the definition of this storage zone in the
OIB.
The FIFO principle is not applied to intermediate storage because actual packaging units have already
been reserved as refill packaging units.
Clearing up intermediate storage

The intermediate storage must be cleared up at regular intervals by active picking of the remaining stock
(e.g. weekly), because sometimes more material is requested than is required in actual production and
this material then accumulates needlessly in the intermediate storage.
1. Start the Material Management - Packaging Unit Management dialog.
2. Open the Filter tab.
3. Enter the filter conditions, e.g.:
Location = Tower XY
Booked to location <= (e.g. date one week ago)
4. Click OK.
A list of packaging units that match the conditions is displayed.
5. Select the packaging units that you want to pick.
6. Click Prepare Picking.
The Prepare Picking dialog is displayed.
7. Select the Delivery Location. As a rule, this would be your main stock location.
8. You can enter a Hint, e.g., what to watch out for when transporting the packaging unit.
9. You can select a Printer on which you want to print the pick list.

2 Workflows
10. Click OK.

A pick list is generated for the selected packaging units.
11. Process the pick list on the PDA (see Process Packaging Unit List dialog on page 283).
2.9.13 Picking material for external suppliers

This section describes how to pick material that is managed by the Material Manager for external
production by a supplier.
Note
Material cannot be booked back in
Material that is picked for external production leaves the system and normally remains with
the supplier. It is not possible for this material to be re-entered in the system with the "old"
packaging unit ID.
If the material that has been picked for an external supplier is to be returned to the system,
the standardized path through Material Receipt (see Receiving incoming materials on page
47) must be used for this – after the material has undergone appropriate quality assurance.
MSD material that has already been opened should not be reintroduced into the system
because its floor life cannot be reliably determined.
Requirement:
In order to be able to complete such a transaction, the Extended Workbench delivery location must
have been enabled in the FactoryExplorer OIB module.
Start the WORKS Studio by double-clicking on the symbol on your Desktop or, in Windows 8 and

2 Workflows

2. In the Application settings - Material Manager tree structure, mark the entry Inheritable Factory
Layout Settings.
3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, mark the Production Line or Storage Zone for which an
extended workbench is to be configured.
4. Enable the Extended Workbench option in Project Settings.
Pick material for "Extended Workbench"

In order for material to be transferred to external production, it must be issued to the delivery location
Extended Workbench.
1. In Material Requirement - Material Requirements List click Create New List to access the Create /
Edit material requirements list dialog (see Creating / Editing a material requirements list (details) on
page 128).
2. In the material requirements list area, select the Extended Workbench item in the Target Location
drop-down list.
3. Assign the materials you want to process in the external project to this material requirements list.
When picking, the material is booked to the Extended Workbench target location and its status is set to
consumed.

2 Workflows
2.10 Material Forecast

If you are not sure whether sufficient material is available to produce a setup list, production schedule,
job or lot, you can use the Material Forecast dialog with the specific objective of checking your material
stocks. If you ascertain that the material in the warehouse is insufficient, you can reorder the material
that is missing (depending on your system configuration).
Note
A list of alternative components can be defined for each component in SIPLACE Pro.
Alternative components that already exist in the system are not included in the forecast
calculation. The result of the calculation is always based on the preferred material configured
in SIPLACE Pro.
To calculate and display the required material, proceed as follows:

1. In Line, select the production line that you want to use in production.
2. In Type, select which type of production specification you want to process (setup list, production
plan, job or specific lots).
All existing production specifications (for example, setup lists) for the line selected are displayed in
the tree structure on the left.
3. Select the production specification that you want to produce.
If the production specification selected has subordinate lots, these are displayed under the
production specification in the tree structure.
4. Select the lot in the tree structure for which you want to create the material forecast.
If you want to create the material forecast for multiple lots, you can select these lots in the tree
structure and then group them together in the Selected Recipes list by clicking Add. In Quantity, you
can change the quantity and Unit (boards or panels) for those lots selected in the Selected Recipes
list.
5. Once you have selected the relevant production specification and adjusted it (if required), click
Calculate Material Forecast.
The Material Manager then calculates the material requirement for the production specification that has
been configured and compares this against the existing material. Depending on the volume of
production data, this may take some time. The result of this calculation is then displayed in the table on
the right.
The following data (in each case with the number of packaging units and the number of components) is
displayed in the table:
l The total requirement per material in order to produce the production specification.
l The currently undeliverable requirement per material (missing parts).
l The material available on the production line.
Note
Note that, for technical reasons, material consumption on the line may be reported with a
time delay of up to 60 minutes and, therefore, this stock information may become obsolete
during production.
l The material available in a warehouse adjacent to the line.

l The material available in the supply storage zone from which the warehouse adjacent to the line is
filled.

2 Workflows
At the respective storage units, only material that is not locked, not reserved elsewhere, and not already
en route to a storage unit and not booked to a PickingPlace type storage unit is taken into consideration.
If the stock level is not sufficient, in other words, if more material is needed than is available, these
missing parts are highlighted and displayed at the top of the list.
If the requirement itself cannot be filled with the material on the line, the corresponding line in the table is
highlighted in red.
If a partial quantity of the material located on the line is urgently required, the corresponding line in the
table is highlighted in yellow because the stock values on the line may already be obsolete (as described
above).
You can print the material forecast by clicking Print. If the Print missing parts only option is enabled,
only the missing materials are printed. If this option is disabled, the entire material forecast is printed.
If an external warehouse is connected to the Material Manager, you can use the Reorder missing
material or Reorder missing material ignoring line amount button to order the missing requirement
from this external warehouse.
Reorder missing material
When calculating the shortfall for purposes of reordering missing materials, all components located
in the line storage zone and on the line are counted.
Use this button if you are certain that the stock level on the line will change little or not at all before the
missing materials are delivered, e.g., because production will not begin until a point in time after the
missing materials are delivered and the stock level will certainly remain unchanged until then.
Reordering missing material ignoring the amount
When calculating the shortfall for purposes of reordering the missing material, only the components
located in the line storage zone are counted. The stock level on the line will be ignored.
Use this button if you are not certain that the stock level on the line will not change before the missing
materials are delivered, e.g., because you do not know whether the components available are to be
used for another production run.
2.11 Material Manager on the line

The operator does not need to perform any specific Material Manager actions on the line. The Material
Manager receives the relevant information automatically from the WORKS Setup Center.
Setting up or splicing material

The scanning of barcodes enables the Setup Center to detect when a new reel or a feeder module
arrives on the line. The Setup Center sends a corresponding message to the Material Manager, which
then books the reel into the line.
Tearing down
As a rule, each production line has a storage zone assigned to it from which the materials needed for
production are supplied. In turn, each storage zone contains a storage unit of the PickingPlace type.
The PickingPlace is a temporary sublocation to which materials are automatically booked if they are
between locations, for example, if they are being transported from a warehouse to the line or from the
line back to the warehouse on a trolley or in a box.
During the tear down process on a machine, all left-over materials are booked to the storage zone that is
configured as the supply storage zone for the production line, in other words, to the storage unit acting
as the PickingPlace in this storage zone.

2 Workflows
Reordering
If you discover that you need new material, you can reorder it using the PDA.
1. Select the Material Reorder dialog on the PDA.
2. Select the production line in Location for which you want to request the material.
3. Scan the part number or packaging unit ID of the required material or the track ruler of the reel for
which you need to reorder materials, or enter these using the keyboard.
If you have scanned the packaging unit ID, the corresponding part number is determined
automatically and displayed on the PDA.
4. Tap Approve List and Process.
The Material Manager creates a material requirements list, which you can process as described in
Picking material on page 63.
2.12 MSD handling

MSD-Management
SMD components react differently to moisture in the ambient air. In some components, moisture builds
up on the inside over time, which then evaporates abruptly during soldering. As a result, components
can rupture and become unusable.
This is why manufacturers of SMD components provide detailed information concerning the conditions
in which the various components are to be stored and how they are to be processed.
The standard for classifying the moisture sensitivity levels of SMD components most frequently used
and implemented in the Material Manager is J-STD-020, which was published by JEDEC. This standard
is managed in the Material Manager under the name MSD Level.
After opening the airtight packaging, a material with a limited floor life (MSD level > 1) is only suitable for
production according to the MSD level specified by the manufacturer. For this reason, Material Manager
precisely logs this time.
For every MSD packaging unit, the Material Manager tracks the time for which the packaging unit can
still be processed. The period in which a packaging unit can be processed is given by the time at which
the packaging unit was exposed to ambient moisture and the MSD Level.
l Start the MSD open time when you open the airtight packaging of a packaging unit with a limited floor
life or when you remove the packaging unit from a special dry storage unit (e.g. a nitrogen storage
unit).
l Stop (pause) the MSD open time when you store the packaging unit with a limited floor life in a
special dry storage unit (e.g. nitrogen storage unit).
l You can reset the MSD open time for a packaging unit with a limited floor life under certain
conditions. If the open date is deleted from the database, the packaging unit is treated as if the
packaging had never been opened.
Resetting the MSD open time corrects an error, e.g., if the MSD open time of the wrong packaging
unit was started by mistake.
Further information on starting and stopping the MSD open time can be found in the description of the
MSD-Management on page 155.
Material Manager does not prevent packaging units whose MSD time has already expired from being
picked. However, the operator receives a notification on the PDA if the remaining time for a packaging
unit is below a configurable threshold.
MSD Baking

2 Workflows
Note
Requirement:
The baking process cannot be confirmed unless the packaging unit has been booked into a
storage unit of type Baking (drying oven) beforehand.
the manufacturer.
purpose.
l Selection Manual: When the baking process for the packaging unit has completely finished, you can
reset the MSD open time for the packaging unit to a defined value.
l Selection JEDEC-0338: When the baking process is completely finished, the MSD open time is
always completely reset.
Note
You configure the Maximum number of bakings and the baking times for the different
material thicknesses in WORKS Studio in the Factory Explorer OIB module in the Central
Settings menu under Global Settings on the MSD Baking tab (see MSD Baking tab on page
342).

2 Workflows
Dry storage of MSD material

To protect a packaging unit against moisture, you can store it in a dry cabinet. If a packaging unit is
booked into a storage unit defined in the Material Manager as a dry cabinet, the Material Manager notes
the time. When the packaging unit is booked out again, it is given a credit for the time it has spent in the
dry cabinet. The credit is added to the packaging unit opening date, i.e. the MSD start stamp is shifted
accordingly.
Further information about creating a dry cabinet can be found under Dry cabinet on page 33.
Seal MSD Material

sealed in airtight packaging. After sealing, an MSD stop is activated for this packaging unit or the
packaging unit chain, i.e., the MSD remaining time for the packaging unit is paused.
The packaging unit can then be stored in any storage unit.
The Material Manager assumes that the packaging unit remains sealed until it is set up. The Setup
Center notifies the Material Manager of the setup. As with booking out of the dry cabinet, the packaging
unit then receives a credit for the time in which it was sealed.
In practice, the packaging unit is actually removed from the airtight bag before it is set up. To represent
this, the Material Manager reduces the credit by a configurable value known as the MSD penalty time.
You can prevent the MSD penalty time from being applied by notifying the Material Manager that the air-
tight packaging has been opened using the MSD start PDA function when opening the packaging.
For a description of setting the MSD penalty time see Packaging Unit Management tab on page 338.
For further information on the MSD start PDA function, see MSD Start/Stop dialog on page 288.
Note
MSD penalty times
Various other actions in the Material Manager lead to the air-tight packaging being opened
automatically for data processing reasons and thus to an MSD start, e.g. the IC
Programming function.
In all these cases, an MSD penalty time is applied.

2 Workflows
2.12.1 Checking the packaging unit state / Showing the baking oven contents
To find packaging units that are currently in a drying oven, switch to the MSD Baking Oven dialog in
Information in the Material Manager.
This dialog first displays a table containing an overview of all packaging units currently in a baking oven.
The packaging units displayed are sorted according to the time remaining (column 1).
The following information for the individual packaging units is displayed:
l Length of time left for the packaging unit to remain in the oven
l How many components are in the packaging unit
l Number of times the packaging unit may still be baked
l ...
To reduce the number of packaging units displayed, the following options are available:
l You can search specifically for certain packaging units that are currently in a baking oven or dry rack.
By entering filter criteria, you can search for specific materials or packaging units.
l You can display which packaging units are in a specific baking oven.
By selecting an oven in the Factory Layout on the left-hand side, only the packaging units in the
selected baking oven are displayed in the table.
For a detailed description of this dialog, see MSD Baking Oven on page 247.

2 Workflows
2.12.2 Storing material for baking using the PDA

purpose.
When the baking process has completely finished, you can reset the MSD open time for a packaging
unit with limited floor life to a defined value.
Note
If the packaging unit is removed from the baking oven during the baking process and
scanned at a different place without the baking process having been completed first, the
MSD penalty time is deducted from the MSD time of the packaging unit and the MSD
remaining time is restarted. The number of rebakes left is not increased again.
To store a packaging unit in a baking oven, proceed as follows:

1. Switch to the Manual Storage dialog on the PDA.
2. In Warehouse, choose the storage unit in which you want to store the packaging unit.
This storage unit must be defined in the OIB as a storage unit of the Baking type.
3. Scan the barcode of the packaging unit, or enter the packaging unit ID using the keyboard.
If the number of rebakes left for the packaging unit/part of the packaging unit chain is 0, a warning is
displayed asking you whether the packaging unit is to be stored anyway.
If you confirm storage, the oven is used as a dry rack.
The time until when the packaging unit is to be baked in order to have the maximum remaining time
again is determined for the packaging unit.
To determine the time, the following criteria are taken into account:
l The temperature of the oven
l The thickness of the material
l Whether the packaging unit components are BGA components larger than 17 mm x 17 mm
l The MSD levels of the material
l The interval, how long the MSD time of the packaging unit has already expired
If it is determined that baking the packaging unit is not permitted, an error message is displayed on
the PDA indicating that the packaging unit will not stored in the baking oven.
In this case, the storage process must be aborted.

2 Workflows
2.12.2.1 Reorders from the line
Automatic
If the fill level of a track on a line falls below the warning threshold, this can be used for automatic
reordering in Material Manager. To do this, the corresponding thresholds must be defined in the Setup
Center. If the value falls below the threshold, Setup Center then sends a reorder to Material Manager.
Manual
The operator can also reorder material manually using the SC scanner. However, this is only possible if
the function is configured in the Setup Center.
Manual reorders by an operator are also possible at any time using the Material Manager PDA. For a
description, see Material Manager on the line on page 83.
2.12.3 Picking baked material using the PDA
Note
Requirement:
The baking process cannot be confirmed unless the packaging unit has been booked into a
storage unit of type Baking (drying oven) beforehand.
The times used for reducing the MSD open times for the respective MSD level can be
defined and/or adapted on page 1 of the Creating / Editing a material class (details) on page
197 dialog.
Note
Baking behavior:
l Selection Manual: When the baking process for the packaging unit has completely
finished, you can reset the MSD open time for the packaging unit to a defined value.
l Selection JEDEC-0338: When the baking process is completely finished, the MSD open
time is always completely reset.
To pick a packaging unit from a baking oven, proceed as follows:

1. Switch from the main menu of the PDA to the MSD folder.
2. Start the MSD Baking dialog.
3. Remove the packaging unit from the dry rack.
4. Scan the barcode of the packaging unit, or enter the ID using the keyboard.
The MSD open time of the packaging unit is reduced to the value defined in the material classes (see
page 1 of Creating / Editing a material class (details) on page 197) corresponding to the MSD level.

2 Workflows
2.13 Inventory
2.13.1 Perpetual inventory

In a perpetual inventory, the current stock level of one or more materials is determined once a year.
Materials are identified using their respective part numbers. During the course of a year, all materials
used in the plant must be counted once.
Note
Requirements
To perform the perpetual inventory, it is essential that the following basic requirements are
met:
l All reels must be torn down and must be in the corresponding storage units at the time of
the inventory.
l Before beginning the inventory, all data synchronizations between the Setup Center, the
OIB, and the Material Manager must have been completed smoothly.
Starting the perpetual inventory

1. Switch within Inventory in the Material Manager to the Start Perpetual Inventory dialog.
2. Select the material definitions for which you want to start a perpetual inventory.
3. Select the Printer on which you want to print the perpetual inventory.
4. Click Start Perpetual Inventory.
The system sets today's date in the selected material definitions as the inventory date.
The system then searches for all packaging units that belong to the selected material definitions, and
locks these for the inventory. A list of the packaging units affected is printed on the selected Printer.
The packaging unit quantities counted are to be entered in this list during the inventory. When this has
been completed, the inventory results must be entered in the system using the Start Perpetual
Inventory dialog.
Recording the data

You must now work through the inventory list sequentially.
1. Make your way through the warehouse using the list and search in all the listed storage bins for the
packaging units that are to be checked.
2. Enter the number of components counted for each packaging unit in the inventory list.
3. Continue doing this until you have worked your way through the entire inventory list.
Finishing the perpetual inventory

When you have recorded all the data for the inventory list, enter this in the system.
To transfer the recorded data to the Material Manager, proceed as follows:
1. Switch within Inventory in the Material Manager to the Finish Perpetual Inventory dialog.
2. Select the perpetual inventory that you want to finish in the table.
3. Click Finish Perpetual Inventory.
A dialog is displayed in which you enter the stock levels you counted.

2 Workflows
4. Enter the number of components counted in the relevant quantity fields for each of the packaging
units.
5. Click OK when you have entered all the data that has been counted.
The packaging unit lock is removed and the counted quantities of the packaging units are booked.
Packaging units whose quantity was set to 0 are deleted from the Material Manager.
Part numbers which were not selected the inventory remain unchanged in the Material Manager.
2.13.2 End-of-period inventory

In an end-of-period inventory, all material stocks are recorded on certain date (key date) and entered in
inventory lists. Existing stocks are mapped in their actual state at the specified time (stock taking).
Impact on operations
To perform the end-of-period inventory, production must be suspended completely during this time.
2.13.2.1 Requirements for the end-of-period inventory

To perform the annual end-of-period inventory, it is essential that the following basic requirements are
met.
l All packaging units are either in the corresponding warehouses or on the changeover tables when
the inventory is carried out.
l All data comparisons between the Setup Center, OIB, and Material Manager are completely finished
before the inventory begins.
l No packaging units are set up on the line.
You have removed tables for X feeders from the machines.
You have assigned a new setup to tables for S feeders without re-registering the tables on the
machine.
2.13.2.2 Limitations
If you have overlooked a packaging unit during the inventory and have failed to record it, you need to
recover it by giving it a new packaging unit ID in the Material Receipt - Identify Incoming Material
dialog.
2.13.2.3 Performing the end-of-period inventory
Preparations
Make sure that all the requirements described in Requirements for the end-of-period inventory on page
91 are met.
Performing the end-of-period inventory

Perform the end-of-period inventory described below for all your site's storage zones in succession.
1. Switch within Inventory in the Material Manager to the Period Inventory dialog.
2. Select the storage zone in the tree structure for which you want to carry out an end-of-period
inventory.
3. Select the storage units that you want to exclude from the inventory in Confirm Inventory for.
All the storage units defined for the selected storage zone are displayed under Confirm Inventory
for.
If you are sure which materials are located at these storage units and in what quantities, you can
disable manual counting of the packaging units for individual and multiple storage units by selecting

2 Workflows
the check box in front of the corresponding storage unit. The inventory quantity is then set as the
actual quantity.
4. Click Start Inventory.
The Finish Inventory button is displayed instead of Start Inventory.
The inventory lists are generated in the background and sent to the PDAs, which your colleagues
use to perform the inventory in the selected storage zone.
You use a PDA to repeat the steps that now follow one after the other for the various storage zones
configured in the inventory.
During the stock taking process, you count the exact number of components in a packaging unit and
compare this actual quantity with the value saved in the system. If both values are the same, tap
Confirm to confirm the saved value. If both values are different, tap Change to change the saved value.
5. Start the Inventory Packaging Unit dialog.
6. Select the storage zone you want to edit in Location.
7. Scan the barcode of the location where the material can be found.
l If the material is on a rack, scan the rack barcode.
l If the material that you want to process is on a Table in the pre setup area, scan the table
barcode.
8. Tap Start Inventory.
Enter all materials that are in the selected location as described below.
9. Scan the packaging unit barcode.
The material ID of the packaging unit and the number of components saved in the system that should
be in the packaging unit are displayed.
10. Count the number of components that are actually in the packaging unit.
11. Enter the value you counted in the input field.
In the case of packaging unit chains, several input fields are available for entering the quantity.
If the value determined matches the saved value, the Confirm button is displayed.
If the two values do not match, the Change button is displayed.
12. Tap Confirm or Change to complete this process.
When you tap Change, the saved value is updated in the system.
13. Repeat the process described (steps 9 to 12) for all packaging units at this location.
14. When you have processed a rack or table completely, tap Back.
15. Select the next current location for further processing (step 6).
16. Begin the inventory again for the current location (steps 9 to 15).
17. When you have entered all the data for this end-of-period inventory, click Finish Inventory in the
Period Inventory dialog in Inventory in the Material Manager to complete the end-of-period
inventory.
The data recorded in the Material Manager is transferred to the Setup Center. All packaging units in the
Material Manager are updated with the new actual quantities.
Note
While the inventory for a storage zone is in progress, it is still possible to rebook packaging
units within that storage zone. However, the affected packaging units must be counted
before performing the operation.
Transfers across storage zone boundaries can only be made once the inventory for the
receiving storage zone is complete.

2 Workflows
Note
After completion of the inventory for a storage zone, all packaging units not recorded are set
to consumed and booked to the site.
After completion of the inventory for the factory, all packaging units previously booked to the
site are automatically deleted in the Material Manager.
2.13.2.4 Handling error messages

Different error messages may occur during stock taking, which must be processed as described:
The location entered and storage unit defined do not match.

The following error message is displayed on the PDA:
“Location does not match. Clarification needed."
No data is booked.
Action:
l Check the process data in the systems accordingly and make any necessary adjustments. Once that
data has been adjusted, repeat the process in the Inventory dialog of the PDA.
A packaging unit ID is included that has already been deleted in the Material Manager.
The following error message is displayed on the PDA:
"Packaging unit unknown! Clarification needed."
Action:
l Check the process data in the systems accordingly and make any necessary adjustments. Once that
data has been adjusted, repeat the process in the Inventory dialog of the PDA.
The physical packaging unit on the changeover table does not exist in the Material Manager, but is
scanned during the inventory.
Check and clarify the packaging unit history.
Action:
l Create a new packaging unit in the system in which you normally create packaging units.
The physical packaging unit on the changeover table does not exist in the Setup Center or in the
Material Manager, but is scanned during the inventory.
Check and clarify the packaging unit history.
Action:
l Create a new packaging unit in the Material Manager.
A packaging unit exists on the changeover table in the Material Manager, but does not physically
exist and is therefore not scanned during the inventory.
Action:
l Delete the packaging unit in the Material Manager.
l The Setup Center receives a deletion record from the Material Manager.
A packaging unit exists on the changeover table in the Setup Center, but does not physically exist
and is therefore not scanned during the inventory.
Action:

2 Workflows
l Delete the packaging unit in the Material Manager.

l The Setup Center receives a deletion record from the Material Manager.
The Inventory dialog in the Material Manager displays a packaging unit chain A, B, C during the
inventory, but only A exists physically.
Action:
The Setup Center receives deletion records for packaging units B and C.
A difference between the saved quantity and the physical quantity of a packaging unit is determined
in the Inventory dialog in the Material Manager.
Action:
l The Setup Center receives an update for the packaging unit quantity.
2.14 IC Programming
You can convert a material to another material with different properties in Material Manager. This may
happen when you finish a raw part for a product, for instance, when you program firmware on a blank
EPROM. To differentiate between the two materials, the finished material is assigned a new part number
and a new label is stuck on the packaging unit.
1. Switch within Material Management in the Material Manager to the IC Programming dialog.
2. Scan or enter the packaging unit ID of the raw part packaging unit whose ICs are to be programmed.
3. Scan or enter the part number to be assigned to the programmed material.
4. Select the Machine to be used for programming.
All work cells defined as work stations for IC programming are displayed in the drop-down list.
5. Select the storage bin size for the new packaging unit in Packaging Size.
6. Under Quantity, enter the number of components to be programmed.
7. Under IC Packaging Unit Quantity, enter the number of components that each packaging unit
should contain.
Example:
If you enter 10,000 under Quantity and 500 under IC Packaging Unit Quantity, 20 packaging units
each with 500 programmed components will then be created and the corresponding labels are
printed for the packaging units.
If the number of available raw parts entered in Quantity in the Raw Part area is sufficient, a new
packaging unit is created and a label is printed for this packaging unit.
The number of raw parts is reduced by the number of components entered in Quantity in the IC
Programmed area. If the raw parts are used up completely, the related packaging unit data record is
deleted.
If the number of raw parts is not sufficient for the new packaging unit, you can enter additional raw parts
until you reach the number of programmed components entered in Quantity in the IC Programmed
area.
If the number of programmed components entered in Quantity in the IC Programmed area cannot be
achieved, you can click Book at any time to start creating the new packaging unit.
For a description of how to create an IC programming location, see Creating an IC programming location
on page 42.

2 Workflows
2.15 Creating a barcode

To make processing easier, e.g. material identification, some Material Manager functions can also be
triggered directly using keyboard shortcuts or by scanning corresponding command barcodes with the
PDA.
To create barcodes, e.g. to scan commands or print labels, we recommend the following procedure:
1. Open a blank Word document.
2. Enter the relevant code, for example “$ENTER$” or a packaging unit number “$xxxxxxxxxx$”.
It is important that the text always begins and ends with $.
3. Highlight the text you have entered and assign it the font 3of9.
4. Print the barcode.
2.16 Implicit bookings

If a packaging unit is picked for production on a line, it is first booked to the PickingPlace defined for the
storage zone. When the packaging unit then arrives on the line, it is rebooked to the line.
However, you can also configure a line so that the picked material is booked directly to the line.
To book picked material directly to the line:

2 Workflows

2. In the Application settings - WORKS Material Manager tree structure, mark the entry Non-
3. In the Factory Layout tree structure, select the line you want to configure.
4. In the Picking area, enable the Book packaging units to this production line when picked option.
Other implicit bookings
l If a packaging unit is torn down after production, it is booked to the first storage unit in alphanumeric
order in the supply storage zone. For example, this can be the PickingPlace defined for the supply
storage zone.
l When tearing down, MSD material is always booked to the supply storage zone PickingPlace.
l Moving a feeder module on the line automatically leads to rebooking of the packaging unit to the
supply storage zone PickingPlace.
Note
MSA
For MSA there are other implicit bookings.

3 User interface web

This section describes the user interface of the Material Manager.


3.2 General functions
3.2.1 Log in
To work with the Material Manager, you need to log in to the system with your user name and password.
Note
If you have not yet saved the Material Manager as a favorite and/or you do not know the URL
for starting the Material Manager, ask your system administrator for the URL.
Your system administrator has assigned a range of access rights to your user name. These rights
determine which dialogs you are allowed to edit, which menus your authorizations allow you to display,
and which functions you can use.
1. Start your browser.
2. Click the favorite you have saved for accessing the Material Manager, or enter the relevant URL in
the address bar of your browser.
The Material Manager login dialog is displayed.
Figure 3 - 1: Login dialog
3. Enter the ID under which you want to work in User Name.

4. Enter the correct password for the user name in Password.
5. Click Login.
The system checks your login details.
If you entered the correct login information, the main window of the Material Manager is displayed.

3.2.2 Layout of the main window

The main window of the Material Manager is divided into the header, a navigation area on the left-hand
side, a workspace in the middle, and a footer.
Figure 3 - 2: Layout of the main window
1. Link that opens a submenu in which you:

lConfigure the user interface language.
lCall the user interface help.
l Call the page containing information about the current version of the Material Manager.
2. Name of the dialog currently displayed.

3. You use the navigation area to select the individual dialogs of the Material Manager.
4. Workspace in which the individual dialogs are displayed.
The icons in the footer perform the following actions:
5. Back to home.
6. Back to the previous dialog.
7. Displays the page containing information about the current version of the Material Manager.
8. Log off - Exit the Material Manager.
9. Opens the Material Manager help.
10. Area for displaying Material Manager messages.
11. Name of the server on which the Material Manager application is installed.
12. The user name of the user currently logged in.

3.2.3 Logging off
Figure 3 - 3: Logging off
To exit your current session in the Material Manager, click at the bottom of the main window.
The current dialog closes without saving any changes and the login dialog is displayed.
3.2.4 Changing your password
Note
Requirements
This function is only available if the Material Manager User Management option was
selected in the Selection of the User Management System dialog during the installation of
Note
If you are already logged in to the Material Manager, you first need to log off in order to
change your password.

To change your password, proceed as follows:

1. Click Change Password in the login dialog of the Material Manager.
The dialog for changing your password is displayed.
Figure 3 - 4: Change Password dialog
2. Enter the ID under which you work in User Name.

3. Enter your current password in Old Password.
4. Enter your new password in New Password.
5. Check that you entered your new password correctly by entering it again in Confirm New Password.
6. Click OK.
The system checks your entries.
If you have entered everything correctly, your new password is saved and you can use your user name
with the new password immediately.
3.2.5 Importing data

To make it easier to enter master data, you can edit it in an external file and then import it to the Material
Manager.
Procedure
To import data to the Material Manager, proceed as follows:
l Create the required import file (see Creating an import file on page 102).
l Import the file you have created to the Material Manager (see Importing a CSV file on page 103).
l Check whether the import was successful (see Checking an import on page 104).

3.2.5.1 Creating an import file

1. Create an empty import file in CSV format.
2. Enter the data that you want to import later on in the import file according to the appropriate data
structure for the object.
Alternatively, you can also create the CSV file using an export from Excel, for example.
Note
For a description of the various data structures, see Data structures for the import on page
345 in the appendix.
Structure of the CSV files

The following rules apply when creating a CSV file:
l The import file must be organized like a table according to the respective predefined data structure.
l Each line corresponds exactly to one data record.
l The values must be entered in the data fields in the correct order as specified by the data structure.
l The individual data fields must be separated by a semicolon (;).
l Some data fields in the import file are optional. If you do not want to enter data in one of these fields,
leave it empty (empty string, no spaces). Two semicolons appear in the import file at this point in
direct succession.
Note
The import file does not allow any headers, empty lines, or comments.
Data types
The following data types are used for the data fields in the import file.
Int
The value may only consist of integers. [0-9]
Float
The same as Int, but the value may contain a comma, e.g. 2,7 or 47,11.
Note
Dots instead of commas are not permitted.
String
Any character string except for a semicolon (;).
l If a semicolon is required within the string, the entire string must be enclosed in quotation marks
(" ").
Example: "<substring1> ; <substring2>"
l If quotation marks are required within the string, the entire string must be enclosed in quotation
marks (" ") and the substring concerned in double quotation marks ("" "").
Example: "<substring1> ""<substring2>"" <substring3>"

Example of a correct data record

(Data record for a storage bin)
The data record has the following fields:
Storage Bin, Description, Part Number, Capacity, Size, Preferred Storage Location, MSD Pause
Sample data record:
01-01-02;Sample Location 2;MATID01;0;Open;1;1;1
or if the content of the last 3 fields is unknown:
01-01-02;Sample Location 2;MATID01;0;Open;;;
3.2.5.2 Importing a CSV file
Figure 3 - 5: Import dialog
To import a CSV file you have prepared to the Material Manager, proceed as follows:
1. Switch to the dialog in which you want to import the CSV file.
2. Click the Import tab.
3. Click Browse.
6. Click Import.
Alternatively, you can specify the path and name of the import file in the Import File field, and then click
Import.
The prepared data is imported to the database and displayed as a table in the relevant dialog. A log file
is also created. You can find the log file on the Material Manager Application Server in the System Temp
directory under /MaterialManagerImport/.

3.2.5.3 Checking an import

If no messages are displayed at the bottom of the Material Manager, the import was successful and the
imported data is displayed in the dialog.
If the Errors during import message is displayed:
1. Click Open log file.
2. Check the log file.
3. Correct the import file according to the entries that you find in the log file.
4. Import the CSV file again.
5. Wait to see whether messages are displayed at the bottom of the Material Manager.
If the import was successful, the imported data is displayed in the current dialog.
3.2.6 Exporting data

You can export most of the tables displayed in the Material Manager as CSV files. The filter settings,
column sequences, and sort orders are copied from the current view during the export.
Figure 3 - 6: Export dialog
To export the data, proceed as follows:

1. Click the Export tab.
A list of the column titles contained in the table is displayed.
2. Select the columns whose contents are to be written to the export file.
3. Enable the Column Names as Headlines option if the column names are to be displayed in the first
line of the export file as headers.
4. Click Export.
A dialog is displayed in which you can save the export file that has been created wherever you choose.

3.2.7 Customizing tables
3.2.7.1 Refreshing the table display
Figure 3 - 7: Refresh table icon
Click this icon to the right of the tab title to refresh the table display.
3.2.7.2 Filtering data

You use the filter function to reduce the content displayed in tables to specific data. You define individual
conditions by selecting a column, selecting an operator for this column, and then entering a reference
value.
You can also combine several conditions with each other to further reduce the data displayed.
Figure 3 - 8: Filter dialog

To filter data, proceed as follows:

1. Click the Filter tab.
Configure the required filter criteria:
2. Click New Condition.
3. Select the column whose contents you want to filter in Field.
4. Select the operator that is to apply for this condition in Condition.
5. Enter the reference value in Value that is to be applied by the operator to the contents of Field.
Example:
Field: Quantity
Condition: <
Value: 200
If you apply this condition, the table only displays packaging units containing fewer than 200
components.
You can define additional filter criteria on other lines, if required, to refine the target quantity.
6. Click Apply to start the filter process.
When the data is filtered, all activated filter criteria in Active filter are processed from top to bottom. Each
additional filter uses the data volume that has already been reduced by the previous filters and
generates a refined result from this.
You can reuse a filter that you have configured later on by saving it under a suitable name. All the filter
settings you have defined are offered for reuse in a drop-down list in Saved filter.
Field description
Saved filter
Filter
Drop-down list containing the filter conditions you have already defined.
Buttons for managing filters

Save
Saves the current filter conditions under the selected filter.
Save as
Opens the dialog in which you save the current filter conditions under a new name.
Delete
Deletes the selected filter from the drop-down list.
Active filter
Use the checkboxes in this area to enable or disable individual conditions. Only the conditions that are
enabled are processed from top to bottom. Each additional condition uses the data volume that has
already been reduced by the previous conditions.

Buttons for using filters

Apply
The table content is refreshed, and the data reduced by the filter conditions is displayed in the table.
The maximum hit count is restricted to 500 hits to avoid memory overflow.
New Condition
Creates a new empty filter condition.
Reset
All the filter conditions displayed are deleted and the table is refreshed.
Check Result Count
Executes the database query using the current filter conditions, but only shows the number of entries
found.
Show All Matches
The table content is refreshed, and the data reduced by the filter conditions is displayed in the table.
The maximum number of results is not restricted.

3.2.7.3 Customizing the layout

Use this dialog to customize the layout of a table according to your needs. You define which columns are
to be displayed and in which order, as well as the content by which the data displayed is to be sorted.
Figure 3 - 9: Layout dialog
To customize the table layout, proceed as follows:

1. Click the Layout tab.
2. Configure the required table layout:
l By enabling/disabling the respective checkboxes on the left next to the column names, you show
or hide the table columns separately.
l Click the arrow icons to arrange the order in which the individual columns appear. The order in
which the columns are listed from top to bottom determines the order in which they are displayed
from left to right in the table.
You can also move the columns by dragging and dropping them to the required position.
l By specifying the sort order within a column (not sorted/ascending/descending), you determine
the order of the data records (lines) displayed in the table.
Buttons
Restore
Restores the default data display in the table.
Delete Sort
Restores all the sort orders of the columns that were changed to Not sorted.
Publish
Defines the current setting as the new default setting.

3.3 Material Receipt
3.3.1 Identify Incoming Material and Print Labels
Figure 3 - 10: Identify Incoming Material and Print Labels dialog
Access right required for this dialog: IdentifyIncomingMaterial.aspx
Note
Different views
There are several versions of this dialog depending on the installation.
This section describes the version with the maximum number of fields and options. It is
possible that you have a different version installed on your system, and so your user
interface may not display all fields described in this section.
Existing packaging units that arrive in production areas managed by the Material Manager are
processed using the Material Receipt dialog.
Use this dialog to enter all material packaging units that do not yet exist in the system.
To coordinate and keep track of the flow of materials within the plant, a data record with a packaging unit
ID is created for each packaging unit and a label is printed, which is stuck on the packaging unit to
uniquely identify it within the Material Manager.
From that moment, all changes to the packaging unit are logged. The systems always knows the
whereabouts of the packaging unit, the number of components it contains, and the expiry date of the
component, if applicable. You can use the history to track how individual parts of the packaging unit
were used.
All identified materials are assigned to the identification point (location) selected in this dialog. The
materials entered can then be stored.

Procedure
1. The Material Manager provides an option that allows you to enter more than one packaging unit with
identical properties at the same time.
Enter the number of packaging units that you want to enter in Number of Packing Units.
2. Enter or scan the Part Number of the packaging unit.
The system uses this entry to display the article number, description, and a drop-down list of possible
manufacturers of this material.
3. Choose the material Manufacturer from the drop-down list.
4. Scan the packaging unit barcode.
l If the label on the material has a 2D barcode (Data Matrix), read this in Scan String using the
scanner.
The information contained in the barcode is transferred to the dialog.
l If the label on the material has NO 2D barcode, scan the other barcodes in the corresponding
input fields.
5. Enter the additional information for the material in the fields described below.
6. Finish identification:
l Click Book to save the data entered.
If you are entering more than one packaging unit (Packaging Unit > 1), a dialog opens in which
you can enter the packaging unit-specific data for the individual packaging units separately.
l Click Book All to book all packaging units with the same data entered in this dialog.
The packaging unit is registered in the system and the packaging and packaging unit labels are
printed.
7. Stick the labels on the relevant packaging units.
Field description
Note
This dialog can be configured by a specially trained service technician. This may mean that
some of the fields described are not visible or that the fields are displayed in a different order.
Note
Mandatory fields
The fields highlighted in yellow are mandatory fields.
Name
Host-ID
Name of the computer on which you are identifying the material.
You can only select the name if you have the AllowToChangeLocation access right. Otherwise, the
name is read and entered automatically.
Name
Name of the location assigned to the host ID (e.g. storage zone or line).
Box Information & Printing
Number of Packing Units
Enter the number of packaging units that you want to enter here.
Requirement: The properties of all these packaging units must be the same.

SiMM Material
Part Number
Alias name of the material used for commercial purposes.
The entry is usually the same as the article number, but you can also specify an alias.
Article Number
Internal material ID used for technical purposes, e.g. in SIPLACE Pro and Setup Center.
This number matches the material's component number used in SIPLACE Pro.
Description
Additional information about the material properties or type.
Manufacturer
Drop-down list of the manufacturers from whom this material can be ordered.
Only the manufacturers that are already known in the Material Manager, i.e., those which have been
entered in Master Data - Manufacturer via the Edit Manufacturer dialog (see Creating / Editing a
manufacturer (details) on page 201), are displayed.
Scan String
Barcode
Input field for scanning a 2D barcode affixed to the packaging unit by the manufacturer.
The matching barcode rule must be present in the BarcodeTypes.xml file in order for scanning to
work.
The BarcodeTypes.xml file may only be edited by ASMPT service technicians.
Material Manufacturer Comment
Comment
Output field that displays a description of the material or manufacturer.
Material Manufacturer
Part Number
Part number / material name assigned by the manufacturer.
The system determines the part number and/or article number used in the Material Manager, as well
as the description from the data entered here.
If a material name assigned by the manufacturer does not yet exist in the system, it first needs to be
created in the system's master data (see Material Definition on page 183).
Box Information & Printing
Purchase Order Number
Internal purchase order number used for ordering the material.
Date Code
Packaging Size
Packaging unit size that is used for finding a storage location. A material can only be stored in a
storage bin if its size is equal to or greater than the value entered here.
MSD Level
Specifies the time during which the material may be used for production once the airtight packaging
has been opened.
Quantity
Total number of all components contained in the packaging units belonging to the delivery.

Number of Label Copies

Number of labels to be printed.
In the case of MSD material, for example, an additional label is required that can be stuck on the
packaging.
Buttons
Book
The data entered is saved, and the label is printed for the packaging unit.
If you are entering more than one packaging unit (Packaging Unit > 1) and book these separately by
clicking this button, a dialog is then displayed in which you enter the data for the individual packaging
units separately and print a label for each of these.
Book All
All packaging units are booked with the same data entered in this dialog, and a label is printed for
each packaging unit.
Reset
All entries are discarded, the input fields are cleared, and the dialog starts from the beginning with
the entry for the Number of Packing Units.
Keyboard control
For a description of how to create control barcodes, see Creating a barcode on page 95.
Enter key
Confirms the entry and moves to the next field.
Alternatively, you can also trigger this by scanning the $ENTER$ control barcode.
Shift + Enter key
Goes back to the previous field.
Ctrl + Enter key
Triggers the booking.
Alternatively, you can also trigger the booking by scanning the $BOOK$ control barcode.
ESC key
All entries are discarded and the dialog is reset.

3.3.1.1 Details of Packaging Units
Figure 3 - 11: Details of Packaging Units dialog
Note
Different views
There are several versions of this dialog depending on the installation.
This section describes the version with the maximum number of fields and options. It is
possible that you have a different version installed on your system, and so your user
interface may not display all fields described in this section.
This dialog is displayed when you identify more than one packaging unit at once and then book them
separately. Use this dialog to enter the properties for each of the packaging units individually in the
Material Manager.
Field description
Material
This line displays the data that was entered in the Identify Incoming Material dialog.
Packaging Unit
Barcode
Input field for scanning a manufacturer's 2D barcode on the packaging unit.
Part Number
Part number / material name assigned by the manufacturer.
Quantity
Number of components that can be changed. This quantity is allocated to the individual packaging
units automatically.

Date Code
Brightness Class
Attribute for describing the brightness of LEDs.
Production Date
Date on which the material was produced.
Permitted shelf life (months)
Specifies the period in months for which the material can be stored.
Sealing date
Date on which the material was sealed.
Expiry Date
Date on which the material expires and the material may no longer be used.
MSD Level
has been opened.
Option RoHS Compliant
Enable this option if the material complies with the RoHS directive.
Packaging Size
Buttons
OK
The changes are booked and a new label is printed for each packaging unit.
Book All
All packaging units are booked with the same data entered in this dialog, and a label is printed for
each packaging unit.
Cancel
The action is canceled without saving any data, and the dialog closes.

3.3.2 Incoming Material Notification
Figure 3 - 12: Incoming Material Notification dialog
Access right required for this dialog: IncomingMaterialNotification.aspx

This dialog displays all existing notifications that have not yet been processed. Each notification
represents an announced material delivery that will take place in the near future.
The data contained in the notifications comes from external systems, e.g. ERP, and is automatically fed
into the Material Manager via the web service interface.
A notification can consist of one or more material items. If more than one material item is processed
within a notification, a notification item is created with the same notification ID for each material item, in
other words, a notification item always corresponds exactly to a material item.
Procedure
When material is delivered, you first need to clarify which delivery it is. The conventional identifiers for
this are the Shipping Note or the Notification ID.
1. Filter the data displayed according to the unique identifier normally used within your company.
All items belonging to the delivery are displayed as the result.
2. Check whether the delivery has arrived complete and in the expected state.
To do this, compare the quantity and data of the items displayed with the delivered material.
l If there are any differences, you can correct the data saved in the Material Manager.
Select the notification item whose data you want to correct.
Click Edit Notification Item.
l If the differences are too great or the material is in an unacceptable state, you can delete a
notification item.
Select the notification item that you want to delete.
Click Delete Notification Item.

3. If you are happy with the quantity and state of the delivery, you can enter the delivered material in the
Material Manager.
Select the notification item that you want to enter.
Click Identify Incoming Material.
The Identify Incoming Material dialog opens and the data from the notification item is transferred.
Incoming Material Notification Item table
Notification ID
Notification ID assigned by the external system.
Notification Pos
Notification item number assigned by the external system.
Creation Date
Date on which the incoming material notification was created in the Material Manager.
Part Number
Source Warehouse
Name of the warehouse from which the material is to be picked.
Destination Warehouse
Name of the warehouse in which the material is to be stored.
Movement Type
Code used for commercial purposes to explain why the material is to be transported to the
destination warehouse.
Initial Quantity
Original number of components in the packaging unit.
Remaining Quantity
Current number of components in the packaging unit.
Unit Of Measurement
Unit of measurement in which the material quantity is specified.
Manufacturer
Name of the manufacturer.
You can use the manufacturer name or code.
Packaging unit ID assigned by the manufacturer.
The manufacturer packaging unit is managed together with the packaging unit ID generated by the
system, and can be used for tracking purposes.
Production Date
Expiry Date
Processing Date
Date and time when this incoming material notification item was processed.
User Name
Name of the user who created the notification.

Packaging Unit
Unique ID of the packaging unit.
Shipping Note
Number of the shipping note that accompanies the delivery.
Brightness Class
Receipt Date
Date on which the material was delivered to the central warehouse.
Date Code
RoHS Compliant
Shows whether the packaging unit complies with the RoHS directive.
MSD Level
has been opened.
Locked
If this option is enabled, the notification was locked.
SAP Order, SAP Position, Transport Job, Transport Job Position
Data that is used for processing with SAP.
Ask your SAP system administrator for more detailed information on the meaning of these fields.
Finished
Shows whether the notification item was processed.
Buttons
Edit Notification Item
Opens the dialog in which you can change the data for the selected notification item to the actual
current state of the packaging unit.
Delete Notification Item
Deletes the selected notification item.
This may be necessary, for example, if incorrect data was transferred from the external system.
Opens the dialog in which you can enter the material described in the selected notification item in the
Material Manager.

3.3.2.1 Edit Incoming Material Notification Item
Figure 3 - 13: Edit Incoming Material Notification Item dialog
Access right required for this dialog: IncomingMaterialNotification.aspx

Differences may occur when comparing the data saved in the notification item with the actual material
delivered, for instance, because the wrong data was transmitted.
Use this dialog to correct the notification item data saved in the Material Manager, for instance, an
incorrectly entered quantity, in order to enter the delivered material correctly in a later step.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Incoming Material Notification Item

Notification Pos.
Internal number of the notification item.
Notification ID
Notification ID to which this notification item belongs.
You cannot change this number.
Article Number
Source Warehouse
Name of the warehouse from which the material is to be picked.
Any name can be selected.

Destination Warehouse
Name of the warehouse in which the material is to be stored.
Any designation can be selected.
Movement Type
Code used for commercial purposes to explain why the material is to be transported to the
destination warehouse.
Initial Quantity
Original number of components in the packaging unit.
Remaining Quantity
Current number of components in the packaging unit.
Unit Of Measurement
Unit of measurement in which the material quantity is specified.
Any designation can be selected.
Manufacturer
You can use the manufacturer name or code.
The manufacturer packaging unit is managed together with the packaging unit ID generated by the
system, and can be used for tracking purposes.
Date Code
Packaging Unit
Internal number of the packaging unit.
You can enter this using the keyboard or a hand-held scanner.
MSD Level
has been opened.
Receipt Date
Date on which the material was delivered to the warehouse.
Production Date
Expiry Date
Processing Date
Date and time when this notification item was processed.
User Name
Name of the user who created the notification.
Shipping Note
Brightness Class
Option RoHS Compliant
Enable this option if the material complies with the RoHS directive.

Option Locked
Enable this option if the notification is locked.
Option Finished
Enable this option if the notification is regarded as open in the system, but has actually already been
processed.
Buttons
OK
The data you entered is saved, and the dialog closes.
Cancel
3.3.3 Material Receipt
Figure 3 - 14: Material Receipt dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialReceipt.aspx

Use this dialog to store a packaging unit that already exists in the Material Manager wherever you
choose. If the packaging unit is to be stored in a specific bin, this must first be defined in the storage
zone (see Warehouse on page 210 and Creating / Editing a storage bin on page 215).
Once you have entered the packaging unit data, the Material Manager searches for a suitable storage
bin for storing the packaging unit. When searching for a storage bin, the system takes into account the
packaging size, the MSD level, if applicable, as well as the currently configured storage strategy.
Procedure
1. Use the drop-down list to select the Location where you want to receive the packaging unit.
If you do not have the AllowToChangeLocation access right, you are not allowed to select a
location. Your current location is set by default instead.
2. Select the printer you want to use for label printing.
3. Enter the Packaging Unit ID using the keyboard or a hand-held scanner.

A suitable storage bin is determined and displayed, if found.

4. If necessary, correct the packaging unit data that is displayed (Size of Packing Unit, MSD Level,
Brightness Class, Date Code).
The system determines and displays a suitable storage bin for storing the packaging unit.
5. Click Book to save the packaging unit at this storage location in the system.
6. Place the packaging unit at the indicated storage location or in the indicated bin.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Location
warehouse
Drop-down list of the locations where the material can be stored.
Printer
Drop-down list of the printers available for label printing.
Unique Data
Packaging Unit
ID of the packaging unit or packaging unit chain.
You can enter this using the keyboard or a hand-held scanner.
Material name assigned by the supplier.
This field is visible only if you have the access right AllowEditSupplierMaterialIDInMaterialReceipt.
Note
The Packaging Size, MSD Level, Brightness Class, and Date Code fields are visible only if
you have the access right AllowEditLotPropertiesInMaterialReceipt.
Packaging Size
Packaging unit size that is used for finding a storage location.
A material can only be stored in a storage bin if its size is equal to or greater than the value entered
here. This field is filled by default with the expected size defined for the respective manufacturer. You
can change the size, if necessary.
Access right needed for changing the size: AllowEditStorageBinSizeInMaterialReceipt
MSD Level
has been opened.
Thickness
Material thickness of the component.
BGA
Specifies whether the component is a BGA part.
Brightness Class
Date Code

Return Value
Storage Bin
Number of the storage bin in which the packaging unit is to be stored.
Storage Bin Description
Description of the storage bin in which the packaging unit is to be stored.
Buttons
Book
Saves the packaging unit in the storage bin displayed in the system. You can then store the
packaging unit in the storage bin displayed.
Reset
Discards all entries and clears the input fields.
3.4 Material requirements
3.4.1 Supply overview
Figure 3 - 15: Supply overview dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialSupplyOverview.aspx

This dialog displays an overview of the current material reorders within your factory. In this view, the
most important data relating to these material movements are merged from the material requirements
lists, the pick lists and the transport lists and displayed in summarized form. The processing status
indicates how far the processing of the individual orders has advanced.
Order items table
Target Location
Location where the material is to be delivered.
Part Number

Packaging Units
Number of packaging units that were entered as requirements in the list.
Number of components
Number of components required.
Process State
Current state of the individual material reorder.
Ordered
The material has been ordered.
Reserved
The material has been released to be picked.
Transport
The material has been picked and is on the way to the target location.
Packaging Unit
Packaging unit ID of the material.
The packaging unit number is displayed as soon as the picking process has been started.
Material Requirements List
ID of the material requirements list on the basis of which the required materials were reordered.
Pick List
A pick list containing the specific details about the materials required, which is created by the system
when picking for a material requirements list.
Transport List
List of packaging units that have been picked and are on the way to the target location.
3.4.2 Material Requirement List
Figure 3 - 16: Material Requirement List dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialRequirementList.aspx

Material requirements lists contain precise information about which materials are needed in which
locations, for example, to request all materials needed for production. As a rule, material requirements
lists are generated from SIPLACE Pro setup lists, SIPLACE Pro production schedules, or SIPLACE Pro
jobs, but you can also create them manually, if necessary.

Use this dialog to manage the material requirements lists available in the system. You can create, edit,
delete, approve, and print lists.
Once you have approved the material requirements lists, they can be processed at the various locations
using the applications running on the PDAs. If all the materials in the material requirements lists have
been located and picked, the list status is set to Processed.
The table at the top displays the material requirements lists currently available. In the case of lists that
were generated from a setup list with the Create Location Wise option enabled, collective material
requirements lists are displayed that contain a group of material requirements lists. If you click + at the
beginning of the line, a collective material requirements list opens and displays the individual material
requirements lists it contains.
If you select a material requirements list in the table at the top, the individual requirement list items it
contains are displayed in the table below.
To find certain requirement list items more easily, you can use a filter to reduce the number of entries
displayed in the table.
Material Requirement List table
This table displays all the material requirements lists available in the system.
ID
ID of the material requirements list assigned by the system.
Start Time
Time when processing of the material requirements list began.
End Time
Time when processing of the material requirements list ended.
Approved
This option is enabled if the list has already been approved. In this case, the list can no longer be
edited.
Source
Name of the setup, the production schedule, the job or the file from which the data for the material
requirements list was imported.
Order Cluster
Summary or production orders for which the material requirements list was created.
Not currently used.
Target Location
Supply Storage Zone
Warehouse from which the material is received.
Order ID
Freely usable text field.
Ordering Location
Line that requires the material.
Intermediate Storage Zone
Displays a refill storage location which has been configured as an intermediate storage location.
Type
Displays the list type: Initial Material, Refill Material or Reorder Material
Only MSD Material
This option is enabled if it is a MSD material.

Station
Name of the machine in the production line.
Task ID
Task ID used by MSA / MDC (refer to the Order Manager user guide [item no.: 00900295-xx]).
Reorder Counter
Counter of additional packaging units for a production line.
Buttons
Edit List
Opens the dialog in which you can edit a new material requirements list that was created manually.
Requirement:
The material requirements list is not approved.
Access right required: AllowMaterialRequirementListEdit
You cannot manually edit generated material requirements lists, in other words, lists that were
created from a SIPLACE Pro setup list, a SIPLACE Pro production schedule, or a SIPLACE Pro job
in the Create New List dialog.
Delete List
Deletes the selected material requirements list.
Approve List
Approves the selected material requirements list for processing.
Requirement: The material requirements list is not approved.
Note
You cannot edit an approved list.
To edit an approved list, you must first disapprove the list.

Generated material requirements lists, in other words, lists that were imported from a setup list, a
production schedule, a job or a file in the Create New List dialog, are approved automatically as
soon as they are created.
Disapprove List
Approval of the selected material requirements list is canceled.
If processing has already begun on the list (start time is not blank), the user is requested to confirm
the operation. When the list is disapproved, the start time is deleted automatically.
Requirement: The material requirements list is approved.
Print List
The selected material requirements list is printed on the printer that is assigned to the list's supplier
warehouse.
Requirement: The material requirements list is approved.
Create New List
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new material requirements list.

The two following buttons are only available if the WORKS Material Manager basic version of the
Material Manager has been installed.
Start Picking
The material requirements list is sent to the Material Tower and picking starts there.
Complete Picking
Picking at the Material Tower is completed.
Missing Parts List
The missing parts list contains a list of packaging units that are either not available in the warehouses or
are not available in sufficient quantities.
Print Preview...
If packaging units contained in a material requirements list are missing, a preview of the missing
parts list is displayed.
Print Missing Parts List
Prints the missing parts list displayed on the printer specified in the configuration.
You can change the current printer settings using the OIB - Factory Explorer (see Changing the
Material Manager configuration (OIB) on page 323).
Reorder Missing Parts
The materials listed in the missing parts list are reordered immediately.
Complete Line
If this option is enabled, a total missing parts list is created for the selected material requirements list.
This option is only available if the basic version of the Material Manager has been installed.
Material Requirement List Item table
This table shows all entries for the material requirements list selected in the table above.
Position
Position number of the item in the list assigned by the system.
Part Number
Packaging Units
Total number of packaging units required.
Processed Packaging Units
Number of processed packaging units.
Components
Processed Components
Number of picked components.
Sent
This option is enabled if the list item has already been sent to the target location.
Source
Source Instance
Unique identification of the source.
Station Name

Location
Location inside the machine.
Track
Number of the track on the location.
The following fields are used if you are using a WPC or MTC.
Tower
Number of the tower.
Level
Number of the level.
Division
Number of the division.
This may also be a special feeder module track, e.g. for a 2x8 mm X-Feeder.
Extra 1 - Extra 5
Fields that can be edited using the B2MML interface, which can be used to transfer the material list
items to the target systems (storage units of ASM Material Tower or Active Feeder Storage type
and also external storage systems).
Part Number
Part number.
Description
Description from the material stock.
MSD Level
MSD level of the components.

3.4.2.1 Creating / Editing a material requirements list (details)
Figure 3 - 17: Dialog for creating / editing a material requirements list
Access right required for this dialog: AllowMaterialRequirementListEdit

In this dialog, you can manually create material requirements lists for a specific target location or
generate these lists by means of a data import. You can also delete items from a material requirements
list and reset error descriptions for a failed material order.
When material requirements lists are created, the settings defined in the WORKS Studio - Factory
Explorer are used. If you want to display or change the preset values before creating a material
requirements list, enable the Change Creation Options checkbox in the footer at the bottom of the
dialog. The creation options for material requirements lists are then also displayed in lower area of the
dialog and can be changed temporarily.
You can find a description of how to configure the options for creating material requirements lists in
Setting creation options for material requirements lists on page 63.
Deleting items from a material requirements list
Select the item in the material requirements list that you want to delete.
Click Delete Item.
The selected item is deleted from the material requirements list.

Clear Error
To reset the error description for a failed material order, select the relevant item in the material
requirements list.
Click Clear Error.
The error description is removed from the selected item.
Generating material requirements lists from SIPLACE Pro

You can also fill material requirements lists automatically directly from SIPLACE Pro using imports from
setup lists, production schedules, or jobs.
Note
Material requirements lists generated from SIPLACE Pro can only be created for production
lines.
delivered.
4. To perform the import, click the relevant button, i.e. Import Setup List, Import from Production
Schedule, Import from Job or Import from File.
5. Follow the instructions in the next dialogs.
To import a SIPLACE Pro setup list, see Importing a SIPLACE Pro setup list on page 134.
To import a SIPLACE Pro production schedule, see Importing a SIPLACE Pro production
schedule on page 136.
To import a SIPLACE Pro job, see Importing a SIPLACE Pro job on page 139.
To import from a file, see Importing a material requirements list from a file on page 141.
Note
Approval
Material requirements lists generated from SIPLACE Pro are automatically approved for
processing as soon as they have been created.
For detailed explanations of setup lists, production schedules, and jobs, see the SIPLACE Pro
documentation.
Importing material requirements lists from a file

You can also fill material requirements lists by importing material requirements from a previously
prepared file.
delivered.

5. Click the Import from File button.
6. Follow the instructions in the next dialog (see Importing a material requirements list from a file on
page 141).
Creating a material requirements list manually

This function allows you to reorder individual materials. If you want to reorder several materials, the
Import from File function may be better suited to your purpose.
It is also possible to request an exact number of components for a material. In this case, select Pick
Exact List in List Type. The Number of Components field is displayed below the table instead of the
Number of Packaging Units field. Enter the number of required components in this field. The Change
creation options option is not available in this case.
1. First select the Target Location where the materials are to be delivered. When editing an existing
material requirements list, you cannot change the Target Location.
3. In List Type, select whether the material is an Initial List, a Refill List, or a Pick Exact List.
4. Enter the Part Number of the required material.
6. For the Initial List or Refill List list type, enter the required Number of Packaging Units.
For the Pick Exact List list type, enter the required Number of Components.
7. Press the ENTER key, or click Add.
When creating a new material requirements list, the list name is made up of the target location and
the current sequential number. The name is displayed in List ID at the top of the dialog.
The table below displays the list contents.
To add other items to the material requirements list, repeat steps 2 to 5.
To remove one or more items from the material requirements list, select the item(s) in the first column
of the table, and click Delete Item.
All selected items are deleted from the material requirements list.
Note
Approval
Material requirements lists created manually must then be approved in the overview
(Material Requirement List dialog).
Note
If you create a material requirements list manually, the system checks whether a material
requirements list already exists for the selected Target Location. If this is the case, items are
added to the existing material requirements list when you click Add, and the list is then
displayed for editing in the table.
Field description
List ID
ID of the material requirements list currently being created or edited.

Target Location
Drop-down list for the location where the material is to be delivered later on.
Supply Storage Zone
Selection list for the storage zone from which the material is to be ordered.
The preset storage zone is always the storage zone defined in the factory layout from which the
target location is to be supplied with materials by default.
If necessary, you can select a storage zone other than the preset storage zone here, for example, in
the case of setups if the initial setup is to be supplied from one storage zone and the subsequent
setup is to be supplied from a different storage zone.
List type
Drop-down list for selecting where the material ordered is to be delivered.
Initial List
The material ordered is delivered to the line's setup preparation area.
Use this option if you are starting to build the setup for production.
Refill List
The material ordered is delivered directly to the line.
Use this option if you notice during production that the quantity of the material ordered is not
sufficient to complete production. This may happen, for example, if the number of panels to be
produced increased suddenly.
Pick Exact List
The material ordered is delivered directly to the line.
Use this option if you need an exact number of a certain material.
Order number
Freely usable text field, e.g. for transferring an order number from another system.
The order number is stored in the material requirements list and is passed on to all pick lists for the
material requirements list.
Material Requirement Items
Material Requirement Items table
This table displays all items contained in the current material requirements list.
Position
Position number of the item in the list assigned by the system.
Part Number
Packaging Unit
Total number of packaging units required.
The following fields are filled while working through the list.
Processed Packaging Units
Number of packaging units that have already been processed.
Components
Processed Components
Number of components that have already been processed.

Sent
This option is enabled if the list item has already been sent to the target location.
Error Description
Contains an error description.
Buttons
Delete Item
Deletes the selected list items.
Clear Error
Deletes the error description of the selected list item.
Import Setup List
Opens the dialog in which you import material requirements data from a setup in SIPLACE Pro.
This function is only available if you have the AllowImportSetupList access right.
Import from Production Schedule
Opens the dialog in which you import material requirements data from a production schedule in
SIPLACE Pro.
This function is only available if you have the AllowImportMrlFromProductionSchedule access
right.
Import from Job
Opens the dialog in which you import material requirements data from a job in SIPLACE Pro.
This function is only available if you have the AllowImportMrlFromJob access right.
Import from File
Opens the dialog in which you import material requirements data from a file.
This function is only available if you have the AllowImportMrlFromFile access right.
Fields below the table

Manual Material Requirements List
Part Number
Input field for the part number of a new list item.
Packaging Units
(For Initial List and Refill List list type only)
Number of packaging units to be entered as requirements in the list.
Number of components
(For Pick Exact List list type only)
Number of components to be entered as requirements in the list.
Add
Adds the material entered to the material requirements list.
The following options are displayed when the you have enabled the Change Creation Options
checkbox in the footer at the bottom of the dialog.
These options are not available for the Pick Exact List list type.
Using these settings, you can define whether material requirements lists are to be split before they are
created to suit different usage scenarios, e.g.,
l Separate material requirements lists for refill list
l location-oriented material requirements lists for basic setup, refill and reordered material

l special material requirements lists for MSD material.

With the options shown, you can temporarily overwrite the settings for creating material requirements
lists which are predefined in the WORKS Studio - Factory Explorer.
Create separate material requirements list for ...
... Refill List
If this option has been enabled, two separate material requirements lists are created, one for basic
setup material and one for refill material. The material is transported to the delivery location in two
stages. As soon as the picking procedure for the packaging units in one of the lists is completed,
transport of this material is started.
If this option has been disabled, a single material requirements list is created for both basic setup
material and refill material. This can result in setup not beginning until later, since picking of all the
packaging materials listed in the common material requirements list must be completed before
transport to the location can begin.
Create material requirements list location wise for ...
... Basic setup material
If this option has been enabled, a separate material requirements list for the initial material is created
for each location.
If this option has been disabled, a total list is created.
... Refill List
If this option has been enabled, a separate material requirements list for refill material is created for
each location.
If this option has been disabled, only one total list is created.
... Reorder list
If this option has been enabled, a separate material requirements list for reordered material is
created for each location.
If this option has been disabled, only one total list is created.
For MSD material requirements list
create separately for basic setup material
If this option has been enabled, material requirements lists are created separately for MSD material
and non-MSD material.
If this option has been disabled, MSD material and basic setup material are written to a common
This option applies to material requirements lists that contain the initial basic setup material and to
common lists if the material requirements list option ... create separately for refill material is
disabled.
This option only applies if the target for the material requirements list is a production line. If it is to be
delivered to another stock location, MSD material and non-MSD material are always included in a
common list.
create separately for refill material
If this option has been enabled, material requirements lists are created separately for MSD material
and non-MSD material.
If this option has been disabled, MSD material and refill material are written to a common material
requirements list.
This option only applies if the target for the material requirements list is a production line. If it is to be
delivered to another stock location, MSD material and non-MSD material are always included in a
common list.

create location wise for basic setup material

If this option has been enabled, a separate material requirements list for initial MSD material is
If this option has been disabled, only one total list is created for initial MSD material.
create location wise for refill material
If this option has been enabled, a separate material requirements list for MSD refill material is
If this option has been disabled, only one total list is created for MSD refill material.
Close
Closes the dialog.
Change creation options
If this option is enabled, the values preset in OIB are displayed and can be changed before you
create a material requirements list.
3.4.2.2 Importing a SIPLACE Pro setup list
Figure 3 - 18: Import Setup List dialog
Use this dialog to create a material requirements list from a setup list managed by SIPLACE Pro.
A SIPLACE Pro setup list contains information that tells you which materials are needed for a certain
setup.
The Material Manager determines the required materials from the setup and generates a material
requirements list from this. Precisely one packaging unit of the required material is entered in the
material requirements list per track.
When the actual picking process is started on the PDA, the material requirements list is transferred to
one or more pick lists that contain the details on the particular packaging units required.
When calculating the pick lists, the system takes into account the properties of the storage zone in
relation to the picking strategy and the picking sort order.
For more detailed information on setup lists, see the Line Control documentation.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the available setups for the various production lines.
The table on the right shows all the components used in the setup you selected.

Note
A component is displayed in the table twice if it is both a fixed and non-fixed component.
Procedure
1. Click the setup in the tree structure from which you want to create a material requirements list.
All components in the selected setup are displayed in the table on the right.
Complete.
If you are creating a new material requirements list, this is then displayed in the Material Requirement
List dialog.
Field description
Option Create Location Wise
This option is displayed below the tree structure.
If it is enabled, a separate material requirements list is created for each location.
The Components in Setup table also displays the Station Name and Location columns.
Components in Setup table
Station Name
Location
Number of the location on the machine.
Part Number
Fixed
Shows whether the material needs to be set up on a specific track on the component table or not.
Quantity
Number of packaging units in the setup.
Unknown Material
Shows whether the component exists in the Material Manager or not.
Buttons
Create Complete
Creates a material requirements list including the fixed components.
Create without Fixed Components
Creates a material requirements list without the fixed components.
Cancel

3.4.2.3 Importing a SIPLACE Pro production schedule
Figure 3 - 19: Import from Production Schedule dialog
Use this dialog to select a SIPLACE Pro production schedule or individual lots in a production schedule
from which you want to create a material requirements list.
The procedure for picking materials for a production schedule is similar to the picking procedure for a
setup. For a production schedule, however, the exact number of required components is defined for
each lot it contains. Using this data and the calculated scrap configured in the material category, the
Material Manager can determine the precise material requirements. The actual number of components
required is therefore entered in the material requirements list. The requested material is requested in the
precise quantities needed for processing the selected production schedule or the selected lot.
For more detailed information on production schedules, see the Line Control online help.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the available production schedules for the various
production lines. If you select a production schedule, the lots contained within the production schedule
are also displayed.
The Components in Production Schedules table shows all the components used in the production
schedule you selected.
Note
A component is displayed more than once if it is set up on multiple tracks.
Procedure
1. Click the production schedule in the tree structure for which you want to create a material
requirements list.
The tree structure displays all the lots contained in the selected production schedule. The table on
the right shows all the components contained in these lots.
2. Select the lot from which you want to create a material requirements list.
You can choose whether to process all lots in the production schedule or only individual lots.

The Components in Production Schedules table is refreshed according to your selection.

Tracks option.
Complete.
Field description
Option Include Spare Tracks
If you enable this option, the alternate tracks are included in the material requirements lists.
Alternate tracks contain components that do not exist for any head steps. For more information on
alternate tracks, see the SIPLACE Pro documentation.
Option Exclude Material on set up Tables
If you enable this option, all materials that have reels with sufficient component quantities on set up
component tables are removed from the material requirements list.
Requirements:
l The "TableID" comment field must have been created in SIPLACE Pro.
l A prerequisite for this function is that the component tables used were prepared for production by
the Setup Center in the Offline Area. Only then is the ID of the component table forwarded to
SIPLACE Pro and the setup information detectable for Material Manager.
l Alternatively, the corresponding "TableID" comment field has to be completed with the physical
table ID for each table in the setup.
Components in Production Schedules table
Station Name
Location
Part Number
Fixed
Components
Number of components required including the calculated scrap configured in the master data.
Unknown Material
Track

Tower
Level
Division
Buttons
Create Complete
Cancel

3.4.2.4 Importing a SIPLACE Pro job
Figure 3 - 20: Import from Job dialog
Use this dialog to select a SIPLACE Pro job or individual lots in a job for which you want to create a
The procedure for picking materials for a job is similar to the picking procedure for a production
schedule. Similar to a production schedule, the exact number of required components is defined for a
job for each lot it contains. Using this data and the calculated scrap configured in the material category,
the Material Manager can determine the precise material requirements. The actual number of
components required is therefore entered in the material requirements list. The requested material is
requested in the precise quantities needed for processing the selected job or the selected lot.
For more detailed information on SIPLACE Pro jobs, see the Line Control online help.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the jobs that have been created for the various
production lines. If you select a job, the lots contained within the job are also displayed.
The Components in Job table shows all the components contained in the job or lots you selected.
Note
A component is displayed more than once if it is set up on multiple tracks.
Procedure
1. Click the job in the tree structure for which you want to create a material requirements list.
The tree structure displays all the lots contained in the selected job. The table on the right shows all
the components contained in these lots.
2. Select the lot from which you want to create a material requirements list.
You can choose whether to process all lots in the job or only individual lots.
The Components in Job table is refreshed according to your selection.
Tracks option.

Complete.
Field description
Option Include Spare Tracks
If you enable this option, the alternate tracks are included in the material requirements lists.
Alternate tracks contain components that do not exist for any head steps. For more information on
alternate tracks, see the SIPLACE Pro documentation.
Option Exclude Material on set up Tables
If you enable this option, all materials already assigned to this setup are removed from the material
requirements list. You use this option to prevent excessive quantities of material from being picked
from the storage zone.
Requirements:
l The "TableID" comment field must have been created in SIPLACE Pro.
l A prerequisite for this function is that the component tables used were prepared for production by
the Setup Center in the Offline Area. Only then is the ID of the component table forwarded to
SIPLACE Pro and the setup information detectable for Material Manager.
l Alternatively, the corresponding "TableID" comment field has to be completed with the physical
table ID for each table in the setup.
Components in Job table
Station Name
Location
Part Number
Fixed
Components
Number of components required including the calculated scrap configured in the master data.
Unknown Material
Track
Tower
Level

Division
Buttons
Create Complete
Cancel
3.4.2.5 Importing a material requirements list from a file
Figure 3 - 21: Dialog for importing data from a file
In order to specifically create a material requirements list for certain materials, you can collect the
requirements data in a file and then import all this data together in a single step.
In this dialog, you select the prepared file from which you want to create a material requirements list.
Procedure
2. Click Browse.
5. Click Import.
A material requirements list is created from the data contained in the selected file, and this list is then
displayed in the Material Requirements List dialog.

If the import fails, the Open log file button is displayed, which allows you to open or save the log file
describing the reason for the import error.
Field description
Target Location
Indicates the location where the material is to be delivered later.
Import File
If you have selected a file, the path and name of the file are displayed here.
Buttons
Import
Creates a material requirements list from the data contained in the selected file.
Open log file
Opens a dialog where you can open or save the log file describing the reason for the import error.
This button is only displayed if a data import has failed.
Close
Exits the dialog.
3.4.3 Material Forecast
Figure 3 - 22: Material Forecast dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialForecast.aspx

Use this dialog to forecast whether sufficient material is currently available on a line for a setup or to run
a job.

Note
This function reflects the current stock level in the Material Manager when the calculation is
performed.
In production schedules, jobs, and lots, the material that, according to SIPLACE Pro, is located
on fixed or constant tables is removed from the forecast.
A list of alternative components can be defined for each component in SIPLACE Pro.
Alternative components that already exist in the system are not included in the forecast
calculation. The result of the calculation is always based on the preferred material configured
in SIPLACE Pro.
Depending on which line and option you select in Type, the tree structure on the left and the table on the
right display the data for Setup Lists, Production Schedules, Jobs or Lots.
When you select the type Production Schedules, Jobs, and Lots, you can specifically select individual
or multiple lots for further processing.
Procedure for material forecasting for setup lists

1. In Line, select the production line for which you want to create a forecast.
2. Select the Setup Lists option in Type.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the available setups for the selected production
line.
3. Select the setup for which you want to create the material forecast.
4. Click Calculate Material Forecast.
Procedure for material forecasting for production schedules

2. Select the Production Schedules option in Type.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the production schedules that were created for
the selected production line. If you select a production schedule, the lots contained within the
production schedule are also displayed.
3. Select the production schedule in the tree structure for which you want to create the material
forecast.
list.
If the production schedule itself is selected, the forecast is calculated for all lots in this production
schedule.
Procedure for material forecasting for jobs

2. In Type, select the Jobs option.
The tree structure on the left-hand side displays all the jobs that were created for the selected
production line. If you select a job, the lots contained within the job are also displayed.

list.
If the job itself is selected, the forecast is calculated for all lots in this job.
Procedure for material forecasting for lots

2. In Type, select the Lots option.
In the tree structure, you see the folders into which the lots for the selected production line are
organized. If you select a folder, the lots contained within this folder are also displayed.
list.
If a folder is selected, the forecast is calculated for all lots contained within this folder.
The Material Forecast Data table shows you what quantity of which material is required in how many
packaging units, and how many packaging units of these materials are available on the production line,
in the SMT storage zone, and in the supply storage zone. If the materials required are not available in
sufficient quantities, these Missing Materials are highlighted in red or yellow at the top of the list.
Materials highlighted in red are definitely not available in sufficient quantities, materials highlighted in
yellow may still be located on the line.
You can print the material forecast by clicking Print. If the Print missing parts only option is enabled,
only the missing materials are printed. If this option is disabled, the entire material forecast is printed.
Field description
Line
Here, you select a production line.
Type
Here, you select whether data for Setup Lists, Production Schedules, Jobs or Lots is displayed in the
tree structure and in the table.
Depending on which line and option you select in Type, the tree structure on the left displays the data for
Setup Lists, Production Schedules, Jobs or Lots.
Add
(for Production Schedules, Jobs, and Lots only)
When you click this button, the lots selected in the tree structure are added to the Selected Recipes
list.
Selected Recipes
This list contains those lots that you have selected in the tree structure for processing.
In Quantity, you can modify entries selected in the list.
To remove selected lots from the list again, select these lots in the list. To select the entire list, use
the Select All option.
To delete all selected lots from the list, click Remove.

Quantity
Here, you can change the quantity and Unit (boards or panels) for the lots selected in the Selected
Recipes list.
Click Apply to apply the change to the lots selected in the Selected Recipes list.
Calculate Material Forecast
Starts the forecast calculation for the Setup Lists, Production Schedules, Jobs or Lots selected.
Material Forecast Data table
Part Number
Requirement
Number of components and packaging units required per material.
Missing Parts
Number of missing components and packaging units per material.
Production line
Name of the production line and number of components and packaging units to be found there.
SMT Storage
Name of the SMT storage zone and number of components and packaging units to be found there.
Supply Storage Zone
Name of the supply storage zone and number of components and packaging units to be found there.
Buttons
Print
Prints the current material forecast.
Option Print missing parts only
If this option is enabled, only the missing materials are printed.
Print material requirement from supply storage
Prints a list of the materials required from the supply storage zone.
Reorder missing material
When calculating the shortfall for purposes of reordering missing materials, all components located
in the line storage zone and on the line are counted.
Use this button if you are certain that the stock level on the line will change little or not at all before the
missing materials are delivered, e.g., because production will not begin until a point in time after the
missing materials are delivered and the stock level will certainly remain unchanged until then.
Reordering missing material ignoring the amount
When calculating the shortfall for purposes of reordering the missing material, only the components
located in the line storage zone are counted. The stock level on the line will be ignored.
Use this button if you are not certain that the stock level on the line will not change before the missing
materials are delivered, e.g., because you do not know whether the components available are to be
used for another production run.

3.4.4 Material Reorder
Figure 3 - 23: Material Reorder dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialReorder.aspx

A material reorder is started automatically by the system if a material falls below the specified minimum
inventory in an SMT warehouse. This material quantity is replenished to at least the planned inventory
level configured in the system.
This dialog displays an overview of all scheduled material reorders.
To order specific materials immediately, select the relevant list item, and click Reorder Material.
To delete specific material reorders, select the relevant list item, and click Delete Material Reorder.
To find certain entries more easily, you can use a filter to reduce the number of entries displayed in the
table.
Material Reorder table
Part Number
Internal ID of the material to be reordered.
Order Quantity
Quantity of material to be reordered.
SMT-Line
SMT-Line for which the material is to be reordered.
Storage bin
ID of the storage bin to which the material is to be delivered.
Number Of Failures
Number of attempts, in other words, how often the reorder was already started and failed.
Last Try
Time when the last reorder was attempted.

Return Value
'Scheduled' if the material order is planned.
Otherwise, the technical key for the error that occurred during the last reorder attempt.
Return Description
Description of the error that occurred during an earlier reorder attempt.
Unit of Quantity
Specifies whether the quantity entered refers to components or packaging units.
Creation Date
Specifies when reordering was triggered.
Type
Specifies whether reordering was triggered manually or when the material fell below the
replenishment threshold.
Buttons
Reorder Material
The selected material is reordered immediately.
If the material is reordered successfully, the entry is deleted from the table.
In the event of an error, the entry remains in the table, and the cause of the error is displayed in the
Return Description field.
Delete Material Reorder
The selected material reorder is deleted.
3.4.5 Pick List
Figure 3 - 24: Pick List dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToProcessPickList.aspx

Use this dialog to view and check pick lists. This view is used primarily by administrators to help with
troubleshooting.
Pick lists are created by the system when picking for a material requirements list is started on the PDA.

If you select a pick list in the table at the top, the individual pick list items it contains are displayed in the
table below.
To find specific pick lists more easily, you can use a filter to reduce the number of pick lists displayed.
Pick List table
This table displays all the pick lists created in the Material Manager.
Pick List ID
ID of the pick list.
Order Cluster ID
ID of the order cluster.
Not currently used.
Creation Date
Date on which the pick list was created.
Roll Out Destination
Location (target location) to which the material is to be picked.
Material Requirement List ID
ID of the material requirements list.
Order ID
Freely usable text field, e.g. for transferring an order number from another system.
Buttons
Print Pick List
The selected pick list is printed.
Delete Pick List
The pick list selected in the top table will be deleted.
The assignment of the packaging units to the pick list will be cleared.
Pick List Item table
This table displays the individual items from the pick list selected above.
Position
Position of the table entry in the pick list.
Packaging Unit
ID of the packaging unit.
Storage Bin
ID of the storage bin.
Components
Number of components to be removed from a packaging unit (for Pick Exact List list type only).
If this column is empty, the entire packaging unit is to be picked.
Picking Error Code
Error that was returned from the PDA operator during picking, e.g. insufficient material.
Source
Station Name
Location

Track
Tower
Level
Division
Extra 1 - Extra 5
Fields that can be edited using the B2MML interface, which can be used to transfer the material list
items to the target systems (storage units of ASM Material Tower or Active Feeder Storage type
and also external storage systems).
3.4.6 Transport List
Figure 3 - 25: Transport List dialog
Access right required for this dialog: TransportList.aspx

In this dialog, you see an overview of all transport lists in the top table. A transport list contains a list of all
packaging units that have been picked and are already on the way to the their target location.
The bottom table shows the individual items in the transport list that is selected in the top table.

Transport Lists table

ID
Transport List number
Target Location
ID of the material requirements list on the basis of which the required materials were reordered.
Due Date
Time by which the material transport is to have been completed.
Transport List Items table
Position
Sequential number of the entry in the transport list.
Packaging Unit
Packaging unit number of the material, assigned by the system.
Part Number
Packaging Units
Number of packaging units that were entered as requirements in the list.
Name
Location to which the packaging unit is currently booked.
State
Current progress in transporting the material.
Pick List
A pick list containing the specific details about the materials required, which is created by the system
when picking for a material requirements list.
Buttons
Delete Transport List
Deletes the transport list that was previously selected in the Transport Lists table.
Delete Transport List Item
Deletes the entry previously selected in the Transport List Item table from the transport list.

3.5 Material Management
3.5.1 Material Clearing
Figure 3 - 26: Material Clearing dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialLotClearing.aspx

Use this dialog to manually correct the location of a packaging unit and/or the number (quantity) of
components contained in it.
You use this function in the following cases, for example:
l If materials leave the area in your site managed by the Material Manager.
l If materials return from an external area to the area in your site managed by the Material Manager.
l If there is an obvious error.

Procedure
1. Scan the packaging unit ID, or enter the packaging unit ID using the keyboard, and press the ENTER
key.
The data saved for the packaging unit (part number, current quantity, and current location) is
displayed.
2. If the quantity saved does not match the actual quantity, enter the New Quantity.
3. Use the drop-down list to select the New Location where you want to store the packaging unit.
4. Click Book.
5. Store the packaging unit in the storage location shown in the dialog.
If the MSD open time was started by mistake for a packaging unit with a limited floor life, but the
packaging unit is still completely unopened, you can reset the MSD open time for the packaging unit by
clicking MSD Reset.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Current Packaging Unit Data

Packaging Unit
ID of the packaging unit whose data is to be corrected.
Part Number
Quantity
Currently saved number of components in the packaging unit.
warehouse
Current location of the packaging unit.
New Packaging Unit Data
New Quantity
Corrected number of components in the packaging unit.
New Location
Corrected location of the packaging unit.
If you do not have the AllowToChangeLocation access right, you are not allowed to select a new
location. Your current location is set as the location by default instead.
Storage bin
Number of the storage bin in which the packaging unit is to be stored.
Storage Bin Description
Description of the storage bin in which the packaging unit is to be stored.
Buttons
Book
Saves the changes made for this packaging unit.

MSD Reset
Deletes the open date from the database. The packaging unit is treated as if the packaging had
never been opened.
3.5.2 IC Programming
Note
For a description on how to create an IC programming space, see Creating an IC
programming location on page 42.
Figure 3 - 27: IC Programming dialog
Use this dialog when you further process a raw part for a product, for instance, when you install firmware
onto a blank EPROM.
Procedure
1. Scan or enter the packaging unit ID of the raw part packaging unit whose ICs are to be programmed.
2. Scan or enter the part number to be assigned to the programmed material.
3. Select the Machine to be used for programming.
4. Select the storage bin size for the new packaging unit in Packaging Size.
5. Under Quantity, enter the number of components to be programmed.
6. Under IC Packaging Unit Quantity, enter the number of components that each packaging unit
should contain.
Example:
If you enter 10,000 under Quantity and 500 under IC Packaging Unit Quantity, 20 packaging units
each with 500 programmed components will then be created and the corresponding labels are
printed for the packaging units.
If the number of available raw parts entered in Quantity in the Raw Part area is sufficient, a new
packaging unit is created and a label is printed for this packaging unit.

The number of raw parts is reduced by the number of components entered in Quantity in the IC
Programmed area. If the raw parts are used up completely, the related packaging unit data record is
deleted.
If the number of raw parts is not sufficient for the new packaging unit, you can enter additional raw parts
until you reach the number of programmed components entered in Quantity in the IC Programmed
area.
Click Book to trigger the creation of the new packaging unit at any time.
Residual materials must first be stored before they can be used further.
Field description
Raw Part
Enter the raw material data here.
Packaging Unit
Part Number
ID of the raw material.
Quantity
Number of available raw parts.
IC Programmed
Enter the data for further processing here.
Part Number
Part number of the new material, which results from the raw material programming.
Machine
IC programming location to be used for programming.
All work cells defined as work stations for IC programming are displayed in the drop-down list.
Size
Quantity
Number of components to be programmed.
IC Packaging Unit Quantity
Number of components to be contained in each packaging unit.
New Packaging unit
Packaging Unit
ID of another packaging unit that is to be processed.
Selected Packaging units table
This table displays the information saved for the material that was selected for processing.
Packaging Unit
Quantity
Number of components.
Part Number
ID of the raw material.
Manufacturer


Date Code
Buttons
Book
Creates the new packaging unit.
Cancel
Discards all entries and clears the input fields.
3.5.3 MSD-Management
Figure 3 - 28: MSD-Management dialog
You can use this dialog to start, stop (pause), or reset the MSD open time of a packaging unit with a
limited floor life.
SMD components react differently to moisture in the ambient air. In some components, moisture builds
up on the inside over time, which then evaporates abruptly during soldering. As a result, components
can rupture and become unusable.

This is why manufacturers of SMD components provide detailed information concerning the conditions
in which the various components are to be stored and how they are to be processed.
The standard for classifying the moisture sensitivity levels of SMD components most frequently used
and implemented in the Material Manager is J-STD-020, which was published by JEDEC. This standard
is managed in the Material Manager under the name MSD Level.
Level MSD Open Time

1 Unlimited, default value
2 1 year
2A 4 weeks
3 168 hours
4 72 hours
5 48 hours
5A 24 hours
6 Customer-specific value; can be configured
in the Setup Center and applies, on a
system-wide basis, to all packaging units
with MSD Level 6
Usage
production according to the MSD level specified by the manufacturer. The opening time must therefore
be precisely logged.
unit).
l You can reset the MSD open time for a packaging unit with a limited floor life under certain
Procedure
1. Scan or enter the packaging unit ID.
The packaging unit or packaging unit chain is displayed. You can see the current MSD level of the
packaging unit.
2. Select the action that you want to perform for this packaging unit.
l Click Start or scan the $START$ control barcode to start the MSD open time.
l Click Stop or scan the $STOP$ control barcode to pause the MSD open time.
l Click MSD Reset to reset the MSD open time.
For a description of how to create control barcodes, see Creating a barcode on page 95.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields

Location
Storage Zone
Drop-down list of the locations where materials can be stored.
MSD-Management
Packaging Unit
You can enter or scan this number.
The current MSD level of the packaging unit is displayed.
Part Number
Name
Current storage location of the packaging unit.
Total Quantity
Total number of components in the packaging unit.
Current State
Current state of the packaging unit.
The following data is only displayed when you have entered the packaging unit ID.
Packaging Unit / Packaging Unit Chain
Packaging Unit
Quantity
Number of components in the packaging unit.
MSD Level
has been opened.
Open Date
Date on which the packaging unit packaging was opened.
For material with MSD Level > 1 only.
Remaining Time
Length of time during which the material may still be used.
Current State
State of the packaging unit.
Sealed
Indicates whether or not the packaging unit is contained in airtight (MSD-secure) packaging.
Remaining shelf life
Remaining period for which the packaging unit can still be stored.
Rebakes left
Number of times the packaging unit may still be baked.
Buttons
Start
Starts the MSD open time.

Stop
Pauses the MSD open time
MSD Reset
Deletes the open date from the database. The packaging unit is treated as if the packaging had
never been opened.
3.5.4 MSD Baking
Figure 3 - 29: MSD Baking dialog
the manufacturer.
purpose.
When the drying process has completely finished, you can reset the MSD open time for a packaging unit
with limited floor life to a defined value in this dialog.
The times used for reducing the MSD open times for the respective MSD level can be defined and/or
adapted on page 1 of the Creating / Editing a material class (details) on page 197 dialog.
Requirements
The baking process cannot be confirmed unless the packaging unit has been booked into a storage unit
of type Baking (drying oven) beforehand.
Procedure

1. Scan or enter the packaging unit ID.

2. Click Confirm Baking.
The MSD open time of the packaging unit is reduced by the time that is set in the material classes for the
MSD level of the material.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
MSD Baking
Packaging Unit
Buttons
Confirm Baking
The MSD open time of the packaging unit is reduced by the time that is set for the MSD level of the
material.
Note
The Material Manager does not check whether the packaging unit has actually spent the
requisite amount of time in the drying oven. The design and implementation of your
processes must ensure that the correct procedure is followed here.

3.5.5 Seal MSD Material
Figure 3 - 30: Seal MSD Material dialog
Access right required for this dialog: SealMsdMaterial.aspx

sealed in airtight packaging.
Use this dialog to instruct the Material Manager that you want to seal a specific packaging unit in airtight
packaging. After sealing, an MSD stop is activated for this packaging unit or the splice chain, i.e., the
MSD remaining period for the packaging unit is paused and the sealing date is entered.
The packaging unit can then be stored in any storage unit.
Note
Possible delays on the track
If a sealed material is set up or refilled directly on the line, the affected track may be blocked
for up to 2 minutes for technical reasons.
Procedure
1. Scan or enter the ID of the packaging unit that is to be sealed.

The data relating to the packaging unit is displayed, the MSD level and the current MSD remaining
time for the packaging unit is shown.
2. Place the packaging unit in airtight packaging and seal it.
3. Option: Click Print Label to create a new label for the packaging unit, if you want to use new
packaging, for example.
Stick the label on the airtight packaging.
4. Scan the barcode on the packaging to check that the label and the packaging unit really match.
If the label does not match the packaging unit, open the packaging, take the packaging unit out and
begin the process again.
5. If the packaging unit and the label do match, click Seal.
An MSD stop is activated for the packaging unit, the packaging unit receives the status Sealed =
Yes.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Name
Host-ID
Drop-down list of the locations where materials can be stored.
Name
Display of the location that is assigned to the selected computer.
Packaging Unit
Packaging Unit
The following data is only displayed when you have entered the packaging unit ID.
Part Number
Name
Position in which the packaging unit is currently located.
Quantity
Total number of components in the packaging unit.
Current State
Packaging Unit Structure
Packaging Unit
Quantity
MSD Level
has been opened.
Open Date


Remaining Time
Current State
State of the packaging unit.
Sealed
Remaining shelf life
Remaining period for which the packaging unit can still be stored.
Rebakes left
MSD Package Verification
Barcode on package
Barcode of the packaging unit ID on the label attached to the airtight packaging.
Scan this barcode to check that the label and the packaging unit really match.
Buttons
Seal
An MSD stop is activated for the packaging unit, the packaging unit receives the status Sealed =
Yes.
Print Label
Prints a label that matches the packaging unit.
Reset
All entries are discarded, the input fields are cleared and the dialog starts from the beginning with the
input of the ID of the packaging unit or the packaging unit chain.

3.5.6 Packaging Unit Management
Figure 3 - 31: Packaging Unit Management dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialLotManagement.aspx

Use this dialog to manage the packaging units that exist in the system.
The following functions are available to assist you, which you can call using the buttons at the bottom of
the dialog.
l Transport - move a packaging unit to another location.
l Store – store a packaging unit in another storage bin.
l Edit Quantity - change the quantity of material contained in a packaging unit.
l Edit Packaging Unit – edit the details of the selected packaging unit.
l Select a printer and print a label for the selected packaging unit.
l Delete Packaging Unit – delete a packaging unit.
l Prepare Picking for the selected material and generate a packaging unit list.
To find specific packaging units more easily, you can use a filter to reduce the number of packaging units
displayed.
Packaging Unit table
This table displays all the packaging units that exist in the system, together with all relevant information.
Remaining Time
Packaging Unit
Part Number

If you have the MaterialDefinition.aspx access right, you can go directly to the Material Definition
dialog here.
Quantity
Number of components available in the packaging unit.
Available Quantity
Number of components in the packaging unit that are not reserved.
Packaging Unit Chain
If you have the SplicedLot.aspx access right and a packaging unit consists of a packaging unit
chain, the Show link is shown in this column. If you click this link, the packaging unit chain is
displayed in the Spliced Packaging Unit dialog.
Origin Packaging Unit
ID of the packaging unit from which the selected packaging unit was split.
Manufacturer
Supplier
Name of the supplier from whom the material was ordered.
Size
The height of the packaging unit/packaging.
Brightness Class
Shipping Note
Order number of the order placed with the supplier.
Locked
Shows whether the packaging unit is locked for production.
Lock Reason
Shows why the packaging unit was locked.
Name
Current location of the material.
Production Date
Date Code
You can specify a date code as an alternative to the production date.
Expiry Date
Open Date

MSD Level
has been opened.
Status
The current state of a packaging unit.
RoHS Compliant
Approved
Shows whether the packaging unit has been approved.
Setup Location
Position of the packaging unit on the setup table.
Track Barcode
Barcode of the track on which the packaging unit is set up in the feeder module.
Inventory Date
Date on which the packaging unit was last counted in an inventory.
Table
Number of the table on which the packaging unit is located.
Incoming Batch ID
Number of the batch to which this packaging unit was assigned when materials were received.
Creation Date
Date on which the material was entered in the system.
User Name
Name of the user who entered the material in the system.
Scan String
Content (raw data) of the scanned 2D barcode with which the packaging unit was delivered.
Greyzone
Transition zone at the splice site between two packaging units of a packaging unit chain.
It is unclear whether the components within the grey zone belong to one or the other packaging unit.
Comment
Customer-specific comment on the packaging unit.
Extra 1, Extra 2, Extra 3, Extra 4, Extra 5
Content of the comment fields, which you can use as required to describe additional customer-
specific attributes, for example.
Track
Precise name of the track from which the material can be picked in the machine.
<Setup Name SIPLACE Pro>/<station>/<location>/<track>
Last Table
Last known setup table on which the packaging unit was set up.
Material reuse, Current setup, Current steup instance, Planned setup, Planned setup instance
Data transferred from the Material Setup Assistant. A description of these fields can be found in the
documentation for the Material Setup Assistant.

Original Quantity
Original number of components in the packaging unit upon delivery.
Price
Indicator of the value of the material (optional).
Sealed
Select All
Enable this option to select all entries in the table.
Booked to location
Time at which the packaging unit was booked to the location.
Shortest splice MSD open time
In splice chains, each item in the packaging unit chain can have a different MSD open time. This
value can be used to sort or filter by the shortest MSD open time.
Number of reorders
Number showing how often the packaging unit has been reordered using Setup Center.
Thickness
BGA
Specifies whether the component is a BGA (Ball Grid Array) part.
Rebakes left
Bake until
Time until which the packaging unit must remain in the oven.
Period for which the material can be stored.
Sealing date
Permitted shelf life expired
Indicates that the permitted shelf life for the packaging unit has been exceeded.
The mark is reached when the sealing date of the packaging unit plus the permitted shelf life is earlier
than the current date.
Splice chain shelf life expired
Indicates that at least one packaging unit in the splice chain has exceeded the permitted shelf life.
The mark is reached when the sealing date of at least one packaging unit in the splice chain plus the
permitted shelf life is earlier than the current date.
Buttons
Transport
Opens the dialog in which you can transport the material to another location.
Storage
Opens the dialog in which you can move a packaging unit to another storage bin at the same
location.
Edit Quantity
Opens the dialog in which you update the number of components (quantity) of the material in a
packaging unit.

Edit Packaging Unit

Opens the dialog in which you can edit the entries for the selected packaging unit.
Reprint Label
Opens the dialog in which you select a printer for reprinting a label for the selected packaging unit.
Delete Packaging Unit
Deletes the selected packaging unit after confirmation.
Prepare Picking
Opens the dialog in which you can set the delivery location for selected material and generate a pick
list for the selected materials.
Requirement: Before calling up this function, the material to be picked must first be selected in the
table.
3.5.6.1 Transport Packaging Unit
Figure 3 - 32: Transport Packaging Unit dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToTransportLot
Note
This dialog may only be used for administrative tasks.
In this dialog, you only correct the location entered in the system at which a packaging unit
can be found. No other automatic changes are made. For example, the MSD status of an
open MSD packaging unit is not updated if the packaging unit has been stored in an MSD-
secure environment, e.g. dry storage cabinet. In this case, the MSD open time continues
unchanged.
Use this dialog to transport the previously selected packaging unit to a specific location.
The Location drop-down list displays all locations that exist in the system to which the packaging unit
can be transported.

Procedure
1. Select the location in the drop-down list to which you want to move the packaging unit.
2. Click OK.
Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.5.6.2 Store Packaging Unit
Figure 3 - 33: Store Packaging Unit dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToStoreLot

Use this dialog to store a previously selected packaging unit in a specific storage bin at the same
location.
The Storage Bin drop-down list displays all storage bins in which the packaging unit can be stored.
Procedure
1. Select the storage bin in the drop-down list in which you want to store the packaging unit.
2. Click OK.
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.5.6.3 Edit Packaging Unit Quantity
Figure 3 - 34: Edit Packaging Unit Quantity dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToEditLotQuantity

Use this dialog to correct the material quantity of a packaging unit and provide a reason why this
correction was necessary.
A correction may be necessary, for example, to document that certain components were removed from a
packaging unit for a particular purpose. In this case, specify Cost Center Consumption in Posting Key
and specify the cost center for which this removal is to be debited in Posting Reason.
Procedure
1. Enter the new number of components in the packaging unit in Quantity.
2. Select a Posting Key.
3. Enter a relevant text for the posting key as the Posting Reason.
4. Select the printer on which the changed label is to be printed for the packaging unit.
5. Click OK.

Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Edit Packaging Unit Quantity for packaging units

Quantity
Current number of components in the selected packaging unit.
Note
If you enter 0 as the quantity, the packaging unit is deleted.
Edit Packaging Unit Quantity for packaging unit chains

Packaging Unit
If the selected packaging unit consists of a packaging unit chain, the numbers of the individual
spliced packaging units are displayed from top to bottom in the splice sequence (starting with the
head packaging unit and finishing with the splice at the picking position).
Quantity
Current material quantity at the respective spliced packaging unit.
Note
If you enter 0 as the quantity, the packaging unit is deleted.
Posting
Posting Key
Use this drop-down list to select the posting key to be used for posting the quantity correction.
Quantity Correction
The quantity entered for the packaging unit was incorrect and must be corrected.
Enter the reason for the quantity correction in Posting Reason.
Cost Center Consumption
For the billing of consumption for other purposes.
Enter the cost center in Posting Reason to which the packaging unit is to be posted.
Posting Reason
Reason for the quantity correction or cost center to which the packaging unit is to be posted (see
Posting Key above).
Label Printing
Label Printer
Use the drop-down list to select the printer you want to use for printing the new label.
Buttons
OK
When you click this button, the corrected quantity is posted and a new label is printed, if necessary.
Cancel

3.5.6.4 Edit Packaging Unit
Figure 3 - 35: Edit Packaging Unit dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToEditLot

Use this dialog to update the data for one or more previously selected packaging units.
This dialog is typically used by administrators for the manual correction of errors.
Example: Changing a state
A message from the Setup Center announcing that a material was set up has not been received in
the Material Manager. To ensure that the material is available again, you can set the State manually
from SetUp to Available.
Note
Apply Value option
The Apply Value option is only displayed if more than one packaging unit was selected for
editing. This option is shown to the right of each input field or next to the other options.
Use case: One packaging unit is selected

1. Enter the current data in the individual input fields.
2. Click OK.
The changes are saved.

Use case: More than one packaging unit is selected

If values are the same in all selected packaging units, these are displayed in the fields.
If the values in the selected packaging units are different, the relevant fields remain empty and are
highlighted in orange.
Procedure
1. Enter the current data in the individual input fields.
2. Select Apply Value next to the input fields whose content you want to save.
Entries for which you do not select Apply Value are not saved.
3. Click OK.
The changes you select with Apply Value are saved in the selected packaging units.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Edit Packaging Unit

Manufacturer
Name of the manufacturer. You can use the manufacturer name or code.
Shipping Note
Production Date
Date on which the packaging unit was produced.
Date Code
You can specify a date code as an alternative to the production date.
Expiry Date
Open Date
MSD Level
has been opened.
Brightness Class
State
The current usage state of a packaging unit.
Packaging Size
Indicates the size of the packaging unit; this information is used for finding a suitable storage unit. A
material can only be stored in a storage bin if its size is equal to or greater than the value entered

here.
Material reuse, Current setup, Current setup instance, Current setup position
Manufacturer Packaging Unit 2
Information for the second lot – if available.
Manufacturer Location
Address of the manufacturer.
Serial number
Serial number assigned to this packaging unit by the manufacturer.
Apply Value
(Only displayed if more than one packaging unit was selected for editing.)
This option is shown to the right of each input field displayed or next to the other options. Only
changes for which Apply Value is selected are saved for the selected packaging units when you click
OK.
RoHS Compliant
Approved
Indicates whether the packaging unit has been approved.
Sealed
Sealing date
Supplier
User Name
Name of the user who entered the material in the Material Manager.
Extra 1, Extra 2, Extra 3, Extra 4, Extra 5
Comment fields that you can use as required to describe additional customer-specific attributes, for
example.
Planned setup, Planned setup instance, Planned setup position, Constant table
Ordering Code
Additional code for ordering the packaging unit (e.g. the software version in the case of micro
controllers).
Revision Level
Component revision level defined by the manufacturer.

Additional Part Information

Additional information about the component. This field can be used differently depending on the
manufacturer.
Supplier Data
Specific information about the respective supplier.
Booked to location
Time at which the packaging unit was booked to the location.
Comment
Only currently set via the XML import or when importing a higher-level system (e.g. MES).
Number of reorders
Rebakes left
Thickness
BGA
Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.5.6.5 Reprint Packaging Unit Label
Figure 3 - 36: Reprint Packaging Unit Label dialog

Access right required for this dialog: AllowToReprintLotLabel

Use this dialog to select the label printer on which the labels for the previously selected packaging unit
are to be printed, and start printing by clicking OK.
Reprint Packaging Unit Label
Label Printer
Drop-down list from which you can select the printer to be used for printing the new labels.
Buttons
OK
Prints the new labels on the selected printer.
Cancel
3.5.6.6 Prepare Picking
Figure 3 - 37: Store Packaging Unit dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToPreparePicking

In this dialog, you set the delivery location for previously selected material. The Delivery Location drop-
down list displays all locations to which the material can be delivered. A packaging unit list is generated
for the selected packaging units. The packaging units that appear in this list can then be picked using the
PDA function Process Packaging Unit List (see section Process Packaging Unit List dialog on page
283).
Procedure
1. The material to be picked must first be selected in the Packaging Unit Management dialog.
2. In the Delivery Location drop-down list, select the location to which the material is to be delivered.
3. Enter a text for this operation under Notes.

4. Select the printer on which you want to print the pick list in the Printer drop-down list. If you do not
require the pick list in paper form, select No Printout in the list.
5. Click OK.
Buttons
OK
A pick list is generated for the selected materials.
If the selected materials are located in different storage units, several pick lists are generated.
Cancel
3.5.7 Quality Lock
Figure 3 - 38: Quality Lock dialog
Use this dialog to lock or unlock one or more packaging units or packaging unit chain components for
production.
Locking may be necessary to allow materials to undergo a quality inspection. If the material quality is
satisfactory, the material can be unlocked again. If the quality is unsatisfactory, the lock remains in
place, and the lock reason is entered in the system.
To find certain packaging units more easily, you can use a filter for the search, which reduces the
number of entries displayed.
Packaging Unit table
Packaging Unit
Part Number

Quantity
Number of components in the selected packaging unit.
chain, the Show link is shown in this column. If you click this link, the packaging unit chain is
displayed in the Spliced Packaging Unit dialog.
Name
Current location of the material.
Last Table
MSD Remaining Time
Locked
Shows whether the packaging unit is locked.
Lock Reason
Shows why the packaging unit was locked.
Supplier
Manufacturer
Name of the material manufacturer.
Date Code
Handling Unit
This is displayed here provided that the material is in an identifiable container or in a designated
storage bin.
Part number assigned by the manufacturer.
Shipping Note
Number of the shipping note that was delivered with the packaging unit.
Production Date
Expiry Date
MSD Open Date

MSD Level
has been opened.
State
RoHS Compliant
Approved
Setup Location
Inventory Date
Date of the last inventory.
Table
Last known location of the packaging unit.
Incoming Batch ID
Number of the batch to which this packaging unit was assigned when it was received.
Creation Date
Packaging Unit Chain ID
ID on the label of the packaging unit chain.
Inventory ID
Sequential number of the last inventory.
Original Quantity
Actual number of components in the packaging unit upon delivery.
Supplier Quantity
Quantity entered by the manufacturer for the number of components in the packaging unit.
Comment
Customer 1, Customer 2, Customer 3, Customer 4, Customer 5
Track
Select All
Buttons
Quality Lock
Opens the dialog in which you can lock the selected packaging unit and enter a reason why the
selected packaging unit was locked.
The selected packaging unit is then locked for production both in the Material Manager and in the
Setup Center.
Access right required for this function: AllowToBlockLot

Quality Inspection
Opens the dialog in which you can lock the selected packaging unit and enter a reason why the
selected packaging unit is to undergo a quality inspection.
The selected packaging unit is then locked for production in the Material Manager "only".
Access right required for this function: AllowToBlockLot
Unlock
Unlocks the selected packaging unit.
Access right required for this function: AllowToUnblockLot
3.5.7.1 Quality Lock - Lock Reason
Figure 3 - 39: Quality Lock - Lock Reason dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToQualityBlockLot.

Use this dialog to enter the reason why the selected packaging unit was locked in Lock Reason.
1. Enter the reason for the lock.
2. Click OK.
The selected packaging unit is then locked for production both in the Material Manager and in the Setup
Center.
Note
Your user name is logged with this lock.
Buttons
OK
Your entries are saved, the packaging unit is locked, and the dialog closes.

Cancel
3.5.7.2 Quality inspection - Lock Reason
Figure 3 - 40: Quality inspection - Lock Reason dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToBlockLot.

Use this dialog to enter the reason why the selected packaging unit is to undergo a quality inspection in
Lock Reason.
1. Enter the reason for the lock.
2. Click OK.
The selected packaging unit is then locked for production in the Material Manager.
Buttons
OK
Your entries are saved, the packaging unit is locked, and the dialog closes.
Cancel

3.5.8 Split Packaging Unit
Figure 3 - 41: Split Packaging Unit dialog
Access right required for this dialog: SplitMaterialLot.aspx

Use this dialog to split a packaging unit into two packaging units. A new packaging unit is created with
the specified number of components (quantity) and the old packaging unit is saved with the
corresponding reduced quantity.
Note
Packaging Unit ID
The new packaging unit is assigned an ID according to the "Lot" sequence. The "SplitLot"
sequence is only used for splitting bulk material.
Note
Possible data loss
If the selected or current computer is not configured to notify the Setup Center or an external
system of any changes to the packaging unit, a corresponding warning message is displayed
under Location.
In this case, only continue to split the packaging unit if you do not want the packaging unit
information to be forwarded.
If you have administrator rights, you can change the configuration for this computer in OIB
under Factory Layout in the definition of the Storage Unit. If you enable the Notify Setup
Center/External System option, the packaging unit information is forwarded. For a
description on how to use OIB, see Editing the properties of the Factory Layout on page 22.

Procedure
1. Select the location with the label printer on which the new labels are to be printed in Host-ID.
2. Scan or enter the ID of the Packaging Unit that is to be split.
3. Enter the Quantity of components to be split from the selected packaging unit.
4. Change the packing unit Size of the split packaging unit, if required.
5. Click Split.
The number of components (quantity) of the original packaging unit is reduced by the quantity
entered, and a new packaging unit is created with this number of components.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Name
Enter the location of the label printer that you want to use here.
Host-ID
Name of the work cell computer on the network.
You can only select the name if you have the AllowToChangeLocation access right. Otherwise, the
name is read and entered automatically.
Name
Name of the storage unit to which the computer is assigned.
Existing Packaging Unit
Packaging Unit
ID of the packaging unit to be split.
Part Number
Part number of the packaging unit.
Quantity
Number of components in this packaging unit.
New Packaging Unit
Quantity
Number of components to be transferred to the new packaging unit. The remaining components stay
in the old packaging unit.
Size
Size of the storage bin in which the new packaging unit can be stored. This value depends on the
size of the reel used for the new packaging unit.
Buttons
Split
The packaging unit is split, the packaging units are booked, and the new labels printed.
Reset
Cancels the operation and clears all fields.

3.6 Master Data

This section contains descriptions on how to enter and manage the basic data you need for working with
3.6.1 Material Definition
Figure 3 - 42: Material Definition dialog
Access right required for this dialog: AllowToEditMaterialDefinitions

You define the attributes of a material in a material definition. Since you can order the same material
from different manufacturers (suppliers), you can assign more than one manufacturer to each material.
To provide a clear overview of where a material is used, you can assign it to suitable material classes.
Use this dialog to manage the material definitions used in the Material Manager. You can edit material
definitions, delete entries that are no longer required, and create new ones.
If you select a material in the Material Definition table, either the Manufacturers or the Material
Classes assigned to the material are displayed in the table below, depending on which of these options
you select in the drop-down list.
To find certain entries more easily, you can use a filter to reduce the number of entries displayed in the
table.
Note
The manufacturer information for the material must only be entered if it is to be checked or
adopted when receiving packaging units.

Procedure for creating a new material definition

1. Click Create New Material.
2. Enter the material properties in the dialog that appears, and click OK.
The new material definition is displayed in the table.
3. Select the new material definition in the table.
4. Select the Material Manufacturer view in the table below.
5. Click Create New Manufacturer.
6. In the dialog that appears, enter the manufacturer from whom you order the material, and enter the
additional manufacturer information for the material.
Note
If the manufacturer does not yet exist in the system, you must first create this
manufacturer in Master Data - Manufacturer in the Create Manufacturer dialog.
7. Click OK.
Material Definition table
This table displays the information on the individual materials. You can create new materials, edit
materials, or delete them.
Part Number
Article Number
Description
Description of the material.
MSD Level
has been opened.
Brightness Class Required
Shows whether the brightness class needs to be specified when receiving packaging units.
Material Type
Material is differentiated according to the following types:
Raw Material
Base material, e.g. component or circuit board.
Semi Finished Good
Product that still has to go through further processing.
Finished Good
Final end product.
Material Class
Material classes are refinement levels of the material types.
Currently, only the Raw Material material type is further refined.

Material is differentiated according to the following classes:

Component
Raw material component.
This data is forwarded to the Setup Center for processing.
Panel
Raw material panel.
This data is NOT forwarded to the Setup Center.
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Final end product.
Material Category
Material category that was assigned to the material.
If you have the MaterialCategory.aspx access right, you can click the link displayed to go directly to
the Material Category dialog.
Packaging Management
If this option is enabled, the material is delivered on a reel or stick and managed as a packaging unit
If this option is disabled, the material is bulk material or similar.
Approval Required
If this option is enabled, approval is required for packaging units of this material.
Obsolete
If this option is enabled, the material is a "discontinued model" and no packaging units can be
created in the Identify Incoming Material dialog with this material definition. The remaining stock, in
other words, all available packaging units of this material, can still be processed.
Smart FEFO Required
(FEFO = First Expired First Out)
If this option is enabled, the Smart FEFO mechanism is applied in the Identify Incoming Material
dialog.
Inventory Date
Date on which the last perpetual inventory was performed for this material.
Price
Material Reuse
Specifies whether material is to be held in reserve in the Active Feeder Pool.
Calculated
The system calculates whether material is to be held in the Active Feeder Pool or returned to the
main stock location.
Permanent
Material is to be permanently held in reserve in the Active Feeder Pool.
Never
Material is never to be held in reserve in the Active Feeder Pool.
BGA

Thickness
Buttons
Edit Material
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the material.
Delete Material
Deletes the entry for the selected material definition.
You can only delete material definitions if they are no longer used anywhere in the system.
Create New Material
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new material definition.
Import
You can import material definitions from an external system.
In the drop-down list next to the title in the first column of the lower table, you select whether Material
Manufacturers or Material Classes are displayed in this table. The selection you make here also affects
the function of the Filter, Import, and Export tabs.
Material Manufacturer table
This table displays the manufacturers entered from whom the material selected in the Material
Definition table is ordered.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer MSD Level
The time during which the material may used for production once the packaging has been opened.
Size
Packaging unit size for storage bin assignment.
Packaging Unit Quantity
Quantity of the material as supplied by the manufacturer, e.g. number of components per reel.
Comment
Comment related to the material of a specific manufacturer.
Buttons
Edit Assignment
Opens the dialog in which you can change the material data of the assigned manufacturer.
Remove Manufacturer
Deletes the entry for a manufacturer from the list of material manufacturers entered for the material.
You can only delete manufacturers if they are no longer used anywhere in the system.
Assign Manufacturer
Opens the dialog in which you define the manufacturer from whom you order the material selected
previously in the Material Definition table.

Import
You can import material manufacturers from an external system.
Material Class table
This table displays the material classes entered for a material selected in the Material Definition table.
Name
Name of the material class.
Group Name
Name of the group to which this material class is assigned.
Description
Description of the material class.
Buttons
Delete Material Class
Deletes the connection from the selected material definition to the selected material class.
Add Material Class
Opens the dialog in which you can add one or more material classes for the material selected
previously in the Material Definition table.
Import
You can import material classes from an external system.
3.6.1.1 Creating / Editing a material definition (details)
Figure 3 - 43: Dialog for creating / editing a material definition
Use this dialog to create a new material definition or change an existing one.
Procedure
1. Enter the name of the material for commercial purposes in Part Number.

If you are editing a material definition that has already been saved, the content of this field cannot be
changed.
2. In Article Number, enter the internal number of the component as used in SIPLACE Pro and in the
Setup Center.
3. Enter the other attributes and values for the material.
See Field description below for a description of the individual attributes and entries.
4. Click OK.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Material Details
Part Number
Article Number
Note
This number or name must match the component's name used in SIPLACE Pro.
Material Type
Type of material.
Raw Material
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Finished product.
Material Class
Class of the material.
Component
Panel
Raw material circuit boards.
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Final end product.
Material Category
Indicates the quantity of material to be picked in addition to the production requirements to avoid the
reordering of material from the main stock location.
In Master Data - Material Definition - Material Category, you can define any additional material
categories that you need in the dialog for creating / editing a material category.

MSD Level
has been opened.
Description
Price
Material Reuse
Specifies whether material is to be held in reserve in the Active Feeder Pool.
Calculated
Enable this option if the system is to calculate whether the material is to be held in the Active
Feeder Pool or returned to the main stock location. (Default setting)
Permanent
Enable this option if material is to be permanently held in reserve in the Active Feeder Pool.
Never
Enable this option if material is never to be held in reserve in the Active Feeder Pool.
Thickness
This option is only available for the Raw Material material type.
Obsolete
Enable this option if the material can no longer be processed or is already obsolete and can be
deleted.
If the material is obsolete, it can no longer be accepted in the Identify Incoming Material dialog.
Approval Required
Enable this option if approval is required for lots of this material.
Brightness Class Required
Enable this option if the brightness class needs to be specified when identifying incoming material.
This option is only useful for LEDs.
If this option is enabled, storage of the material is refused if no brightness class is defined for the
packaging unit.
Smart FEFO Required
Enable this option if the Smart FEFO (First Expire First Out) mechanism is to be applied in the
Identify Incoming Material dialog.
To apply Smart FEFO, the value "Active" must be set to "True" in the Smart FEFO node of the
ConfigurationApplicationServer.xml file on a project-specific basis. A 3rd party software solution
must evaluate the IncomingBatchID and SmartFEFO fields (B2MML Submessage - Material Lot –
Get Lot) using the Material Manager interfaces.
The Material Manager does not currently use Smart FEFO as a picking strategy.
BGA


Default value for the period for which the material can be stored.
The value assigned here is used when creating new packaging units if the material supplier does not
specify the permitted shelf life.
Default value: 0.
Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.6.1.2 Assigning a material class
Figure 3 - 44: Dialog for assigning a material class
Use this dialog to assign one or more material classes to the selected material definition.
The table displays all material classes that have not yet been assigned to the selected material
definition.
Procedure
1. Select the material class(es) that you want to assign to the material definition.
2. Click OK.

ID

Group Name
Description
Buttons
Select All
OK
Cancel
3.6.1.3 Assigning a material manufacturer
Figure 3 - 45: Dialog for assigning a material manufacturer
Use this dialog to assign a manufacturer from whom you order the material to a material definition, or to
edit the data of a manufacturer already assigned to a material definition.
Procedure
1. Enter the name of the manufacturer in Manufacturer.
2. Enter the manufacturer's name for the material in Part Number (Manufacturer).
3. Fill the remaining fields with the other manufacturer's data for the material.
See Field description below for a description of the individual attributes and entries.
4. Click OK.

Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Material Details
Internal Part Number
Internal number of the selected material in the Material Manager.
Material Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Part Number (Manufacturer)
MSD Level
has been opened.
Thickness
BGA
Size
Size of the packaging unit/packaging.
Quantity of the material as supplied by the manufacturer, e.g. number of components per reel.
Comment
Description of the manufacturer or material.
Period for which material delivered by this manufacturer can be stored.
If no value is specified here, the value assigned in the material definition is used when creating new
packaging units.
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.6.2 Material Category
Figure 3 - 46: Material Category dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialCategory.aspx

Use this dialog to manage the existing material categories. You can edit material categories, delete
entries you no longer require, or create new ones.
In a material category you define the quantity of material to be picked as a preventive measure in
addition to the production requirements to avoid the foreseeable reordering of material from the main
stock location.
In Master Data - Material Definition, you can assign one of the material categories defined here to a
material in the dialog for creating / editing a material definition.
To find the different material categories more easily, you can use a filter for the search, which reduces
the number of material categories displayed.
Material Category table
Name
Name of the category.
Calculated Scrap (in %)
The calculated scrap in % for the respective material category.
Additional Consumption
Additional consumption incurred as a result of production.
Example:
Calculated scrap 0.5%, additional consumption 100, requirements according to bill of materials
7000.
7000 + 7000*0.5% + 100 = 7135

Re-Storage Quantity
Minimum number of components that a packaging unit must contain so that it can be transported
back to the storage zone.
Import
You can import material categories from a CSV file.
Buttons
Edit Category
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the selected category.
Delete Category
Deletes the entry for the selected material category.
Create New Category
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new material category.
3.6.2.1 Creating / Editing a material category (details)
Figure 3 - 47: Dialog for creating / editing a material category
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialCategory.aspx

Use this dialog to create a new material category or change an existing one.

Procedure
1. Enter the Name of the new material category.
When editing an existing material category, you cannot change the name.
1. Enter the Calculated Scrap (in %).
2. Enter the assumed additional consumption.
3. In Re-Storage Quantity enter the minimum number of components that a packaging unit must
contain so that it can be transported back to the warehouse.
4. Click OK.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Material Category
Name
Name of the category.
Calculated Scrap (in %)
The calculated scrap in % for the respective material category.
This value must be entered as a percentage and must therefore be a positive number less than 100.
You can enter decimal places.
Additional Consumption
Additional consumption incurred as a result of production.
Re-Storage Quantity
Minimum number of components that a packaging unit must contain so that it can be transported
back to the storage zone.
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.6.3 Material Class
Figure 3 - 48: Material Class dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialClass.aspx

Use this dialog to manage the existing material classes. You can edit material classes, delete entries
you no longer require, or create new ones.
The material class attributes can be printed on the packaging unit label.
Note
To print the material classes on the labels, the label printing configuration must be
customized by a service technician.
Material classes for MSD Baking

After a packaging unit has been kept for an appropriate time in a drying oven, during which any moisture
that has got into the components is removed, the MSD open time for this packaging unit can be reset.
Normally in this context, the MSD open times of the packaging units are reset to the preset default value
according to the MSD level. In this dialog, you have the option to change the default reset values for the
individual MSD level.
The default material classes for setting the reset values all belong to the MsdLevel group.
Example:
For MSD level 4, a maximum MSD open time of 72 hours is provided. If you think this value is too high for
baked components of this MSD level, you can change the MSD open time for this MSD level as follows:
1. In the table, select the Material Class 4 with group name MsdLevel.
2. Click Edit Material Class.
3. Change the value (in hours) that appears in the Description field according to your requirements.
4. Click OK.

The changed value will be displayed in the table.

Name
Group Name
The “Msd.Level” group is reserved for Material Manager and cannot be changed or supplemented.
Description
Buttons
Edit Material Class
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the selected material class.
Delete Material Class
Deletes the entry for the selected material class.
Create new Material Class
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new material class.
3.6.3.1 Creating / Editing a material class (details)
Figure 3 - 49: Dialog for creating / editing a material class
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialClass.aspx

Use this dialog to create a new material class or change an existing one.
You can use material classes to classify materials by your own search or sort criteria, such as usage or
priorities, which are used in your production environment. When naming a class, it is a good idea to
select a suitable name that conveys the meaning of the class.

Procedure
1. Enter the ID of the new material class.
2. Enter the ID of the group to which this material class is to be assigned.
You can also select the group name from the list of existing IDs.
3. Enter a Description for the material class.
4. Click OK.
Setting material classes for the MSD level
purpose.
When the baking process has completely finished, you can reduce the MSD open time for a packaging
unit with limited floor life by a defined value in the MSD Baking dialog. You define this value using a
material class corresponding to the MSD level.
Under Name you will see the name of the MSD level (e.g., 2a), as the Group, MsdLevel must have been
defined. These values are preset and must not be changed.
In the Description field, you can set the number of hours by which the MSD open time of a material with
this MSD level is to be reduced after the packaging unit has been baked.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Material Class
Name
Group Name
Name of the group to which this material class is to be assigned.
You can use a group name to group several material classes together, e.g. groups with common
classification properties.
Description
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.6.4 Manufacturer
Figure 3 - 50: Manufacturer dialog
Access right required for this dialog: Supplier.aspx

Use this dialog to manage the data for the manufacturers entered in the system, together with their
barcode patterns. You can edit manufacturers, delete entries that are no longer required, or create new
manufacturers.
Manufacturers deliver certain materials in varying packaging unit quantities. There is a label on the
packaging or reel in which materials are delivered featuring manufacturer-specific barcodes, which
contain coded information about the materials being delivered.
Here is an example of a label:
1. Part number barcode 4. Date code barcode

2. Quantity barcode 5. 2D barcode
3. Packaging unit barcode

The table displays the various prefixes contained in the barcodes for each manufacturer. These need to
be removed automatically during scanning when the materials are received. The number in the curly
brackets { } stands for one of the barcode types, e.g. {1} for a quantity barcode.
As manufacturers frequently change their barcode prefixes, the entries in the table should be checked
regularly to make sure they are up to date.
Manufacturer table
Name
Manufacturer name that is managed in the system.
Material Barcode Pattern
Prefix in the part number barcode for a manufacturer.
Example: 1P {0}
Quantity Barcode Pattern
Prefix in the quantity barcode for a manufacturer's material.
Example: Q {1}
Packaging Units Barcode Pattern
Prefix in the packaging unit barcode for a manufacturer's material.
Example: 1T {2}
Datecode Barcode Pattern
Prefix in the datecode barcode for a manufacturer's material.
Example: 9D {3}
Barcode Type
Name of the rule to be used for analyzing any 2D barcodes that also appear on the label.
Buttons
Edit Manufacturer
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the selected manufacturer and related barcode pattern.
Delete Manufacturer
Deletes the entry for the selected manufacturer.
You can only delete manufacturers if they are no longer used anywhere in the system.
Create Manufacturer
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new manufacturer together with the related barcode
patterns.

3.6.4.1 Creating / Editing a manufacturer (details)
Figure 3 - 51: Dialog for creating / editing a manufacturer
Use this dialog to edit the data of an existing manufacturer or create the data for a new manufacturer.
There is a label on the packaging or reel in which materials are delivered featuring manufacturer-specific
barcodes, which contain coded information about the materials being delivered. The different barcodes
contain prefixes that need to be removed when the materials are received so that the information
contained in the barcode can be used in the Material Manager.
In this dialog, you enter the prefix that needs to be removed automatically for each barcode pattern
during scanning when the materials are received.
If no prefixes are entered in the barcode patterns, the system uses the global rule from the configuration.
Procedure
1. Enter the name of the new manufacturer.
When editing an existing manufacturer, you cannot change the name.
1. In the fields for the individual barcode patterns, enter the prefixes that need to be removed
automatically during scanning when the materials are received.
2. If the manufacturer uses 2D barcodes, select the rule from the Barcode Type drop-down list to be
used for analyzing any additional 2D barcodes that appear on the label.
3. Click OK.

Field description
Manufacturer
Name
Enter "{0}" after the prefix.
An example of a complete entry would be "P{0}" or "1P{0}".
An example of a complete entry would be "Q{1}".
An example of a complete entry would be "1T{2}".
An example of a complete entry would be "9D{3}" or "16D{3}".
Barcode Type
Select a suitable rule from the drop-down list predefined by ASMPT.
Alternative input:
If a barcode pattern contains several pieces of information, it is possible to read this string as a
whole. To do this, the individual pieces of information and their position in the string must be known.
This string can then be read four times at the relevant positions.
Example:
The string MATID{0}QTY{1}LOTID{2}DT{3} must be entered in all four input fields so that it can
be processed correctly in all four fields.
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.7 Inventory
3.7.1 Starting the perpetual inventory
Figure 3 - 52: Start Perpetual Inventory dialog
This dialog displays all material definitions that have not yet been counted or that were last counted
more than a year ago. To find specific material definitions more easily, you can use a filter to reduce the
number of material definitions displayed.
Procedure
1. Select the material definitions for which you want to start a perpetual inventory.
2. Select the printer on which you want to print the packaging unit list required for the inventory.
3. Click Start Perpetual Inventory.
The system sets today's date in the selected material definitions as the inventory date.
The system then searches for all packaging units that belong to the selected material definitions, and
locks these for the inventory. A list of the packaging units affected is printed on the selected Printer.
The packaging unit quantities counted are to be entered in this list during the inventory. When this has
been completed, the inventory results must be entered in the system using the Start Perpetual
Inventory dialog.
Inventory Date
Date of the last inventory.
Packaging Units
Number of packaging units.
Part Number

Article Number
Description
Material Type
Material is differentiated according to the following types:
Raw Material
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Final end product.
Material Class
Material is differentiated according to the following classes:
Component
Panel
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Final end product.
Obsolete
Shows whether the material can still be processed or whether it is already obsolete. If the material is
obsolete, it can no longer be accepted in the Identify Incoming Material dialog.
Select All
Printer
Drop-down list of the available printers on which the list of packaging units locked for the inventory
can be printed.
Button
Starts the perpetual inventory for the selected material definitions.

3.7.2 Finishing the perpetual inventory
Figure 3 - 53: Finish Perpetual Inventory dialog
This dialog displays all active perpetual inventories together with the sequential number and date on
which they were created. You can finish a perpetual inventory, in other words, open a dialog in which
you enter the stock levels you have determined for a perpetual inventory in the system, or you can print a
perpetual inventory.
Procedure
To transfer the data determined from the inventory list to the system, proceed as follows:
1. Select the perpetual inventory that you want to finish in the table.
2. Click Finish Perpetual Inventory.
A dialog is displayed in which you enter the stock levels you determined in the system.
To print the packaging unit list again, proceed as follows:

1. Select the perpetual inventory in the table that you want to print.
2. Select the Printer on which you want to print the perpetual inventory.
3. Click Print Perpetual Inventory.
Perpetual Inventory table
First column
Select the perpetual inventory that you want to finish here.
ID
ID of the perpetual inventory.
Creation Date
Date on which the perpetual inventory was created.

Buttons
Opens the dialog in which you enter the stock levels you determined in the system.
Print Perpetual Inventory
Prints the list of the packaging units to be processed in the perpetual inventory.
Printer
Drop-down list of the available printers.
Select the printer on which you want to print the packaging unit list.
3.7.2.1 Entering the data counted
Figure 3 - 54: Dialog for entering the data counted
Use this dialog to report back the results of a perpetual inventory.

The dialog displays all the packaging units that are part of the perpetual inventory.
Procedure
1. Enter the number of components counted in the relevant quantity fields for each of the packaging
units.
2. Click OK when you have entered all the data that has been counted.
Packaging units whose quantity was set to 0 are deleted from the system.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields

Perpetual inventory
ID
Sequential number of the perpetual inventory.
Packaging Unit
Packaging Unit
This icon next to the packaging unit ID indicates packaging unit chains.
Quantity
Quantity of stock counted during the inventory.
Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.7.3 Starting the end-of-period inventory
Figure 3 - 55: Period Inventory dialog
Use this dialog to start a previously prepared end-of-period inventory for one of your storage zones. You
carry out this end-of-period inventory for all your site's storage zones in succession.
The tree structure on the left displays the production lines as well as all the storage zones and storage
units defined in the system where materials can be found.
All the storage units defined for the selected storage zone are displayed in Confirm Inventory for. These
storage units may contain materials that are difficult to access, which first need to be picked in order to
be recorded (e.g. material in a Material Tower). If you are sure about which materials are available in
what quantities at these storage units, you can exclude one or several of these storage units from the
inventory. To do this, enable the checkbox next to the corresponding storage unit.

Requirements for the end-of-period inventory

To perform the annual end-of-period inventory, it is essential that the following basic requirements are
met.
l All packaging units are either in the corresponding warehouses or on the changeover tables when
the inventory is carried out.
l All data comparisons between the Setup Center, OIB, and Material Manager are completely finished
before the inventory begins.
l No packaging units are set up on the line.
You have removed tables for X feeders from the machines.
You have assigned a new setup to tables for S feeders without re-registering the tables on the
machine.
Procedure
1. Select the storage zone in the tree structure for which you want to carry out an end-of-period
inventory.
2. Select the storage units that you want to exclude from the inventory in Confirm Inventory for.
3. Click Start Inventory.
The Finish Inventory button is displayed instead of Start Inventory.
The inventory lists are generated in the background and made available to the PDAs, which your
colleagues can use to carry out the inventory in the selected storage zone.
4. When all the data has been entered, click Finish Inventory to complete the end-of-period inventory.
Field description
S95 Plant Layout
The tree structure on the left displays the production lines as well as all the storage zones and
storage units defined in the system where materials can be found.
Inventory
Inventory ID
ID of the end-of-period inventory.
Confirm Inventory for
List of all storage units defined for the respective storage zone.
You can exclude one or more of these storage units from the inventory if the materials and their
quantities are already known and booked correctly.
Inventory Start Time
Date and time when the last end-of-period inventory started.
This time is updated as soon as the inventory starts.
Inventory End Time
Date and time when the last end-of-period inventory finished.
Once the inventory starts, this entry is hidden until the inventory finishes.
Buttons
Start Inventory
Starts the current end-of-period inventory.
Check Progress
Displays the current processing status of the inventory at the bottom of the Material Manager.

Finish Inventory
Finishes the current end-of-period inventory. The time when the button was clicked is entered in
Inventory End Time.
This button is displayed instead of Start Inventory if the inventory is being processed.
All packaging units that were not found and, as a result, were not counted in the inventory are booked
to the Site and their status is set as Consumed.
3.7.4 Finishing the end-of-period inventory for the site
Figure 3 - 56: Dialog for finishing the end-of-period inventory for the site
You can finish the end-of-period inventory for your entire site if an end-of-period inventory was carried
out for all your site's storage zones.
Note
When finishing the end-of-period inventory for your site, all packaging units that were not
found and, as result, were not counted in the inventory are booked to the Site and given the
status Consumed.
Procedure
To finish the end-of-period inventory for the site, proceed as follows:
1. Check whether an end-of-period inventory has actually been carried out and finished for all your
site's storage zones.
2. Click Finish Inventory For Site to complete the inventory.

3.8 Configuration
3.8.1 Warehouse
Figure 3 - 57: Warehouse dialog
Access right required for this dialog: Warehouse.aspx

Use this dialog to manage the storage bins available in your system. You can edit storage bins, create
new ones, or delete entries that are no longer required. Storage bins are used for storing, moving, and
picking the materials you use. All actions associated with storage bins are logged in the Material
Manager and can therefore be traced at all times. You can use the data collected to determine which
material is available where, and in what quantities.
To find the different storage bins more easily, you can use a filter for the search, which reduces the
number of storage bins displayed.
Using the tree structure

The tree structure represents the warehouse layout: the top level displays the different warehouses and
the levels below display the individual storage zones of the various warehouses.
If you select a warehouse, the table displays all the storage bins of the individual storage zones in this
warehouse.
If you select a storage zone, the table displays all the storage bins for this storage zone.
Field description
Warehouse Layout
The Warehouse Layout area provides an overview of the different storage zones.

Magnifying glass
To go directly to a storage bin, you can enter the storage bin number here. The associated
identification point is then activated immediately.
Tree structure
The tree structure displays the structure of the various storage zones.
Button
Replenishment Thresholds
Opens the dialog in which you can edit or delete the replenishment threshold rule for the storage
zone selected previously in the tree structure.
Access right required: MaterialStock.aspx
Storage Bin table
This table displays all the storage bins that are available for the storage zone selected in the tree
structure.
Storage Bin
ID of the storage bin in the warehouse.
Description
Description of the storage bin.
Part Number
Internal ID of the material that can be stored in the storage bin.
Capacity
Number of packaging units that can be stored in the storage bin.
If 0 is specified, this storage bin can be used for any number of packaging units.
This field should only be used within the project environment in the case of special requirements.
Size
Size of the storage bin. This storage bin can only store materials that are the same size as the value
indicated here or that have a suitable alias size.
Preferred Storage Location
Displays whether the storage bin is to be a preferred storage location.
If several storage bins are available for a material, the packaging unit is stored in the preferred
storage location.
MSD Pause
Displays whether the storage location is a dry storage unit (e.g. nitrogen storage unit), and the
exposure time of the packaging unit once opened is therefore paused.
Locked
Displays whether the storage bin is locked for the storage of packaging units.
Import
You can import storage bins from a CSV file.
First select a storage unit, and then switch to the Import tab.
Buttons
Create
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new storage bin at the storage zone selected in the tree
structure.
Edit
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the selected storage bin.

Delete
Deletes the selected storage bin.
Lock
Locks the storage bin for new packaging units that are to be stored.
Unlock
Unlocks the storage bin for new packaging units that are to be stored.
3.8.1.1 Showing a replenishment threshold
Figure 3 - 58: Show replenishment threshold dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialStock.aspx

Use this dialog to display the replenishment thresholds rules for a warehouse. You can create other
replenishment thresholds, if required.
You use the replenishment threshold rules to specify when the stock levels of the individual materials are
to be replenished automatically.
To find certain entries more easily, you can use a filter for the search, which reduces the number of
replenishment thresholds displayed.
Field description
warehouse
Name
Name of the warehouse for which the replenishment threshold is displayed and maintained.
Reorder storage zone
Name
Name of the warehouse from which a specific quantity of the material is to be reordered if the
material falls below the reorder level.
Replenishment Threshold table

This table displays the replenishment thresholds of the previously selected storage zone.

Part Number
Internal ID of the material for which a replenishment threshold was created in the warehouse.
If you have the MaterialDefinition.aspx access right, you can go directly to the Material Definition
dialog.
Report Inventory Level
Minimum inventory level of the material.
If the total quantity of this material in the warehouse falls below the reorder level, new material is
ordered from the reorder storage zone provided that another order of a sufficient quantity is not
pending.
Planned Inventory
Quantity of the material to be reached again through an order.
Minimum Deliver Quantity
Package unit of the material.
Minimum quantity of the material that must be ordered. If the minimum delivery quantity is not
sufficient to reach the planned inventory, multiple quantities must be ordered.
Requested Quantity
Quantity of this material that has already been ordered from the source warehouse.
When the material ordered arrives at the storage unit to be supplied, the value entered under
Requested Quantity is reduced by the delivery quantity.
A purchase order is deemed to be complete when the requested quantity has been fully delivered.
Unit of Quantity
Buttons
Edit Replenishment Threshold
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the selected replenishment threshold.
Access right required: AllowToEditStock
Delete Replenishment Threshold
Deletes the selected replenishment threshold.
Create New Replenishment Threshold
Opens the dialog in which you can define a new replenishment threshold.
Reset Requested Quantity
The value entered under Requested Quantity is reset to "0", in other words, this order is neutralized
and is ignored when calculating the material that has already been reordered.
This action may be necessary for the following reasons:
l An order has not arrived at the target location even after a long wait time.
l An order has already been delivered but its storage has not been entered in the system.
OK
Closes the dialog.

Creating / Editing a replenishment threshold (details)
Figure 3 - 59: Dialog for creating / editing a replenishment threshold
Use this dialog to define the rules for new replenishment thresholds or change the rules of existing ones.
You use the replenishment threshold rules to specify when the stock levels of the individual materials are
to be replenished automatically.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Replenishment Threshold
warehouse
Name of the selected warehouse for which the replenishment threshold is to be managed.
Part Number
Internal ID of the material for which a replenishment threshold is to be created in the warehouse.
Report Inventory Level
Minimum inventory of the material.
If the total quantity of this material in the warehouse falls below the reorder level, new material is
ordered from the source warehouse provided that another order of a sufficient quantity is not
pending.
Planned Inventory
Quantity of a material to be reached again through an order.
Minimum Deliver Quantity
Package unit of the material.

Minimum quantity of the material that must be ordered. If the minimum delivery quantity is not
sufficient to reach the planned inventory, multiple quantities must be ordered.
Unit of Quantity
Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.8.1.2 Creating / Editing a storage bin
Figure 3 - 60: Dialog for creating / editing a storage bin
Use this dialog to create a new storage bin or change the data of an existing one.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Edit Storage Bin

Storage Bin
Number of the storage bin to be created or changed.
Description
Description of the storage bin.

Capacity
Number of packaging units of a specific material that can be stored in the storage bin.
If you enter 0, this storage bin can be used for any number of packaging units.
Size
Specify the size of the storage bin.
Select a suitable size from the list of defined storage bin sizes.
This information will later be used when searching for a suitable storage bin for a packaging unit.
Part Number
This entry is only required if you want to use this storage bin exclusively for a specific material.
Options
The following two options are only useful if you entered a value in Part Number.
Preferred Storage Location
Enable this option if the storage bin is to be a preferred storage location for the material entered.
If several storage bins are available for a material, this storage bin is suggested as the preferred
storage location.
Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.8.2 Storage Bin Size

Figure 3 - 61: Storage Bin Size dialog
Access right required for this dialog: StorageBinSize.aspx

Use this dialog to manage your storage bin sizes. You can edit them, delete entries you no longer
require, and create new storage bin sizes.
Depending on the storage bin size you select, the table below displays an overview of the manufacturers
for which this storage bin size is used.
Note
The storage bin sizes used for Hänel/Kardex must also exist in these systems.
Storage Bin Size table

ID
Storage bin size number assigned by the system.
Name
Name of the storage bin size.
Description
Description of the storage bin size.
Alias
Name of a storage bin size that can be used as an alternative to the above-mentioned storage bin
size name.
Buttons
Edit Storage Bin Size
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the selected storage bin size.
Delete Storage Bin Size
Deletes the selected storage bin size.
Create New Storage Bin Size
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new storage bin size.
Material Manufacturer table
Part Number
Manufacturer

3.8.2.1 Creating / Editing a storage bin size (details)
Figure 3 - 62: Dialog for creating / editing a storage bin size
Use this dialog to create a new storage bin size or change the data of an existing one.
Field description
Note
Mandatory field
The field highlighted in yellow is a mandatory field.
Storage Bin Size

ID
Number of the storage bin size. The number is assigned by the system and cannot be changed.
Name
Name of the storage bin size.
Description
Description of the storage bin size.
Alias
List of aliases from which you can select a defined storage bin size as the alias storage bin size,
which can be used as an alternative.
The selected alias storage bin size should be greater than the current storage bin size.
Example:
Storage bin size LF-15 is designed for 15" reels and storage bin size LF-7 for 7" reels.
If the storage bin size LF-15 is set as the alias for storage bin size LF-7, a 7" reel can also be stored in
a storage bin for 15" reels.

Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.8.3 Sequence
Figure 3 - 63: Sequence dialog
Access right required for this dialog: Sequence.aspx

Use this dialog to configure the contents of identifiers that are used for different processes in the Material
Manager, such as list names.
In this dialog you edit the sequences that are used in the Material Manager for creating unique
identification numbers and file names.
Note
These configurations may only be performed by a specially trained service technician.
To find specific sequences more easily, you can use a filter to reduce the number of sequences
displayed.
Sequence table
This table displays all the sequences used in the system.
ID
Name of the sequence.

Counter
Displays the current sequence count. If a new number is created from this sequence, the counter
increases by the value indicated in Increment.
Format Mask
The structure of the number created from the sequence is specified in this mask.
Increment
Value by which the counter is to increase each time a new sequence ID is created.
Max
Highest possible counter value.
If the counter reaches the value configured here, this counter is reset to the Initial value or
terminated.
Initial
Value for the counter with which sequence counting is to begin.
Round Robin
If this option is enabled, counting is to start again at the value entered in Initial if the value entered in
Max is exceeded.
If this option is disabled, an error message is displayed if the value entered in Max is exceeded.
Button
Edit Sequence
Opens the dialog for editing the previously selected sequence.
3.8.3.1 Editing a sequence (details)
Figure 3 - 64: Edit sequence dialog
Use this dialog to create a new sequence or change an existing sequence.

Procedure
1. Enter the current Counter value.
The counter increases each time a new sequence is created. By changing the counter, you define a
new initial value.
2. Specify a Format Mask.
See below for a description of the format mask.
3. Enter the value in Increment by which the counter is to increase when a new sequence ID is created.
4. Enter the highest possible counter value in Max.
If the counter reaches this value, it is reset to the value specified in Initial or the sequence is
terminated (see Round Robin option).
5. Enter the initial value in Initial with which sequence counting is to begin.
6. Define what is to happen if the maximum counter value entered in Max is reached.
Enable the Round Robin option if the counter is to start again at the value entered in Initial if the
value entered in Max is exceeded.
Disable the Round Robin option if an error message is to be displayed pointing out that the
maximum counter value has been exceeded if the value entered in Max is exceeded.
7. Click OK.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
Sequence
ID
ID of the sequence.
Counter
Enter the current counter value here.
The counter increases by the value configured in Increment each time a new sequence is created.
If you change the counter value, a new initial value is defined for the sequence as a result.
Format Mask
Enter a string for the format mask here.
Note
The format mask must not begin with a leading "0".
You can use the following characters:

l Upper case letters from A to Z
l Lower case letters from a to z
l Numbers from 0 - 9
l Special characters: + - : * $ % ( )
You can also use the following text replacements:
l {DD} is replaced by the current two-digit day (e.g. 08)
l {MM} is replaced by the current two-digit month (e.g. 05)
l {YY} is replaced by the current two-digit year (e.g. 06)
l {YYYY} is replaced by the current four-digit year (e.g. 2006)
l {CALENDARWEEK} is replaced by the current calendar week (e.g. 47)

l {Digit} indicates the number of digits for a counter. If the counter value does not fill the space,
leading "0s" are added to fill it (e.g. {6} results in 000010).
l {HEX:Digit} indicates the number of digits for a hexadecimal counter, e.g. {HEX:4} could generate
"00AB".
l {VAL:ValueName} is replaced by the contents of the value with the name <ValueName of the
object> for which the sequence is created.
Example:
The placeholder {VAL:MaterialID} is replaced by the part number of the packaging unit for the Lot
sequence.
You can also access the content of values in nested objects.
Example:
The placeholder {VAL:Material.ArticleNumber} is replaced by the article number of the packaging
unit for the Lot sequence.
l {CALENDARWEEK}-{6} results in 48-000010
Examples of a correct format mask:
Test-D{DD}M{MM}Y{YYYY}:{6} results in Test-D29M11Y2006:000010
Consecutive number with 9 digits: {9}
Consecutive number with 5 digits + date: {5}-{DD}{MM}{YYYY}
Consecutive number with 5 digits + material ID: {5}-{VAL:MaterialID}
Increment
Value by which the counter is to increase each time a new sequence ID is created.
Max
Highest possible counter value.
If the counter reaches the value configured here, it is reset to the value specified in Initial or the
sequence is terminated (see Round Robin option).
Initial
Value for the counter with which sequence counting is to begin.
Option Round Robin
Enable this option if the counter is to start again at the value entered in Initial if the value entered in
Max is exceeded.
Disable the Round Robin option if an error message is to be displayed pointing out that the
maximum counter value has been exceeded if the value entered in Max is exceeded.
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.8.4 User Management
Note
Requirements
Figure 3 - 65: User management dialog
Access right required for this dialog: UserManagement.aspx

Use this dialog to manage the users that exist in the system. You can edit users, delete users that are no
longer required, and create new users.
You can also assign users to one or more user groups by clicking Add Group, thereby granting them
group rights to access specific dialogs of the Material Manager, or remove users from groups by clicking
Remove Group, thereby withdrawing access rights.
User table
This table displays all the users that exist in the system along with their ID and name.
ID
Number that was assigned automatically by the system when the user was created.
User Name
User name that was assigned by the administrator.
First Name
First name of the user.
Last Name
Last name of the user.

Buttons
Edit User
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the data of the previously selected user.
Delete User
Deletes the previously selected user together with the user's group memberships.
Create New User
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new user.
Group table
This table displays the groups that are assigned to the selected user.
ID
Group ID that was assigned automatically in the Group Management dialog.
Group Name
Group name that was assigned by the administrator in the Group Management dialog.
Select All
Buttons
Remove Group
The user selected in the table above is removed from the groups selected in the table below, and
specific access rights are therefore also removed from this user.
Add Group
Opens the dialog in which you can add the user selected in the table above to groups, and therefore
also assign specific access rights to this user.

3.8.4.1 Creating / Editing a user
Figure 3 - 66: Dialog for creating / editing a user
Use this dialog to edit the data of an existing user or create a new user.
Procedure
1. Enter the user name with which the user can log in to the system in User Name.
2. Enter the first and last name of the user.
3. Assign the user a password.
4. Enter the password again.
The user can change this password later on.
5. Click OK.
The user is created in the system.
A new user can now log in to the system, but does NOT yet have any access rights.
Field description
Note
Mandatory fields
User
ID
Number that was assigned automatically by the system when the user was created.
User Name
Name (ID) with which the user logs in to the system.
First Name
First name of the user.

Last Name
Last name of the user.
Password
Password for the user name.
The user can change the password later on in the login screen.
Confirm Password
Enter the password again.
Buttons
OK
Cancel
3.8.4.2 Add Group
Figure 3 - 67: Dialog for assigning a group
Access right required for this dialog: UserManagement.aspx

This dialog displays all groups that have not yet been assigned to the selected user and allows you to
assign them to this user here. Enable the groups that you want to assign to the user, and then click OK.
By assigning groups to users, users are granted the group rights to access specific dialogs and functions
of the Material Manager. If you remove a group from a user, this user also loses the access rights
associated with the group.
Group table
First column
Enable or disable the user's group membership in this column.

ID
Internal number of the group.
Group Name
Name of the group.
Select All
Buttons
OK
Click this button to assign the selected groups to the user and close the dialog.
Cancel
3.8.5 Group Management
Note
Requirements
Figure 3 - 68: Group Management dialog
Access right required for this dialog: GroupManagement.aspx

Use this dialog to manage the user groups that exist in the system as well as their access rights. You can
edit user groups, delete entries that are no longer required, and create new user groups.

You define the access rights that each user group is to contain and, in doing so, define the dialogs and
functions that the members of a specific user group are allowed to access.
The table below shows each of the access rights that are already assigned to the user group selected in
the table above.
Note
A new version of the Material Manager may also contain new access rights.
After an update, these new access rights must be assigned to the respective groups.
Group table
This table displays all the defined user groups.
ID
Number that was assigned automatically by the system when the group was created.
Group Name
Name of the user group.
Buttons
Edit Group
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the name of the selected user group.
Delete Group
Deletes the selected user group.
Create New Group
Opens the dialog in which you can create a new user group.
Access Right table
The table below shows all the access rights that are assigned to the user group selected in the table
above. You can remove individual or multiple access rights and add additional access rights.
ID
Number that was assigned automatically by the system when the access rights were created.
Access Right
Name of the access right.
Description
Description of the individual access right.
Select All
Buttons
Remove Access Right
Removes individual or multiple access rights selected previously in the table and, as a result,
removes these authorizations from the user group.
Add Access Right
Opens the dialog in which you can add additional access rights to the user group selected in the table
above.

3.8.5.1 Creating / Editing a group
Figure 3 - 69: Dialog for creating / editing a group
Access right required for this dialog: GroupManagement.aspx

Use this dialog to change the name of an existing user group or create a new one.
Field description
Note
Mandatory field
The field highlighted in yellow is a mandatory field.
Group
ID
Internal number of the group.
The number is assigned by the system when the group is created and cannot be changed.
Group Name
Name of the user group.
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.8.5.2 Assigning access rights
Figure 3 - 70: Dialog for assigning access rights
Access right required for this dialog: AccessRight.aspx

This dialog displays all the access rights that are not yet assigned to the selected user group.
Enable the access rights that you want to add to the user group, and then click OK.
Access Right table
First column
Enable or disable each of the access rights in this column.
ID
Internal number of the access right.
Access Right
Description of the access right.
Select All
Buttons
OK
Cancel

3.8.6 User and role management with OIB User Management
Note
Requirements
This function is only available if the OIB User Management option was selected in the
Selection of the User Management System dialog during the installation of the Material
Manager.
The users and their roles used in the Material Manager are managed in the OIB User Management. A
User Management Administrator can create new users in OIB User Management and then assign them
the user roles that match to their activities.
Note
Material Manager supports only users which are created with the credentials types
Username/Password Credential.
After installing the Material Manager, all required user roles are automatically created in the OIB User
Management.
By default, the following user roles are created for the Material Manager:
Material Manager Incoming
This role contains all the necessary authorizations for work in the context of receiving material.
Material Manager Material Tower
This role contains all authorizations that are necessary for the operation of the Material Tower. (Basic
version)
Material Manager Operator
This role contains the authorizations for the business use cases of the Material Manager, such as the
creation of material requirements lists or inventories.
Material Manager Administrator
This role contains all the necessary authorizations for the complete control, configuration, and
monitoring of the Material Manager.
Detailed information on OIB User Management can be found in the WORKS Operations Information
Broker User Guide, item no. [00900459-xx].

3.9 Administration
3.9.1 Interface (Monitoring)
Figure 3 - 71: Monitoring dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MonitorRecords.aspx

Use this dialog to display the existing monitor records on various topics.
This dialog is used to assist administrators with error analysis and troubleshooting.
To find specific monitor records, select the required topic in the tree structure. All messages related to
the selected topic are displayed in the Monitor Records table.
You can also use a filter to reduce the number of monitor records displayed.
Tree structure
The monitor records are structured according to the following topics:
OIB
The messages that are reported during communication with SIPLACE systems are displayed here.
OIB = Interface between the Material Manager and Setup Center.
Scheduler - Setup Center - OIS - Material Manager - Configuration Management - LC - Line Control
B2MML
The messages that are reported during communication with systems outside the SIPLACE
environment are displayed here.
Material Information - Equipment Information - Production Schedule - Production Performance -
Stock Taking

Material Manager
The messages that are reported within the Material Manager are displayed here.
Booking - Royonic - Batch Processing - Ping
Monitor Records table

This table displays all monitor records that are available for a selected topic in the tree structure.
Document ID
The name of the document used for transmitting the data (if available).
Element ID
The number of the element to be processed.
Time Received
Time stamp indicating when the message was received.
Current State
Attribute that displays the state of an OIB message.
Monitor records for OIB messages are set to Received until they are processed. If they are changed
to Processed, Failed, or Aborted, the Material Manager no longer attempts to process these
messages.
The Material Manager will try again to process messages set to Received.
Time Processed
Time stamp indicating when the message was processed.
Action
Action to be performed for the element.
Processing Counter
Number of attempts made to process this message.
E-mail escalation
Date and time when the last e-mail escalation was performed for this message due to processing
errors.
Return Value
Processing result.
Return Description
Detailed description of the result.
Return Code
Unique result number.
XML Message
Content of the message.
ID
Unique sequential internal message number.
Messages are processed sequentially using this ID.
Button
Edit
Opens the dialog in which you can edit the content of a selected monitor record.

3.9.1.1 Editing a monitor record
Figure 3 - 72: Edit Monitor Record dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MonitorRecords.aspx

Use this dialog to edit the content of a selected monitor record.
Use the < and > buttons at the bottom of the dialog to switch to the previous or next monitor record
respectively.
Field description
Monitor Record
Path
Displays the path used to store the message.
State
Attribute that you can use to change the state of an OIB message.
Monitor records for OIB messages are set to Received until they are processed. If they are changed
to Processed, Failed, or Aborted, the Material Manager no longer attempts to process these
messages.
If a message is reset to Received, the Material Manager will try to process it again.
Return Description
If you set a record to Aborted, enter a reason for this change here.
If a processing error occurs, the error is displayed here.
XML Message
Read-only XML display of the user data (command + data) in the monitor record.

Buttons
<
Switches to the previous monitor record.
>
Switches to the next monitor record.
OK
Cancel
3.10 Information
This section contains descriptions on the various search functions.
3.10.1 Find Material
Figure 3 - 73: Browse Material dialog
Access right required for this dialog: MaterialBrowser.aspx

Use this dialog to search for specific materials or packaging units.
The search results display all locations in the plant layout where the material or packaging unit you are
searching for is located.
You can select a location to further reduce the data displayed in the table.

Note
You can change the sequence and number of columns displayed in the table. To do this,
navigate to the Packaging Unit dialog under Material Management and click the Layout
tab. The column arrangement changed here also applies to the Browse Material dialog.
Field description
Filter
In this area you define the filter criteria according to which the warehouses are to be searched.
After entering a filter, only the locations containing material matching the filter criteria are displayed in
Plant Layout.
Filter For
Choose whether you want to search for a Part Number or Packaging Unit here.
Value
You can enter a search term here.
You can use the wildcard * in the filter term as a placeholder for any number of characters.
Options
Show Consumed Material
If this option is enabled, consumed packaging units are also displayed.
Show Locked Material
If this option is enabled, material marked as locked is also displayed.
Show Material in Splice Chains with ABE
If this option is enabled, splice chains containing a subordinate link that matches the required
material are also displayed.
Buttons
Filter
Enables or refreshes the filter to the search term entered in the "Value" field.
Delete
Disables the filter and clears the filter term from the Value field.
Plant Layout
The tree structure displays an overview of the storage zones and storage units defined in the system.
Magnifying glass
To go directly to a location, you can enter a host ID or a location here. The associated identification
point is then activated immediately.
Material Detail for Selected Location
This table displays the material that is found at the selected location.
Material Details table
Packaging Unit
Part Number
If you have the MaterialDefinition.aspx access right, you can go directly from here to the Material
Definition dialog.

Quantity
Number of components in the respective packaging unit.
Available Quantity
Number of components that are not reserved.
chain, the Show link is displayed in this column. If you click this link, the packaging unit chain is
displayed in a dialog.
Manufacturer
Name of the manufacturer. You can use the manufacturer name or code. This must be assigned to
the material via the material master dialog.
Brightness Class
Handling Unit
This is displayed provided that the material is in an identifiable container or in a storage bin.
Locked
Shows whether the material was assigned a lock.
Lock Reason
Shows why the material was locked.
Production Date
Date Code
Optional field in which you can specify a date code as an alternative to the production date.
Expiry Date
Open Date
MSD Level
has been opened.
Remaining Time
State
RoHS Compliant
Approved

Setup Location
Track Barcode
Barcode of the track on which the packaging unit is set up in the feeder module.
Inventory Date
Date on which the packaging unit was last counted in an inventory.
Table
Number of the table on which the packaging unit is located.
Creation Date
User Name
Greyzone
Comment
General comments.
Track
Last Table
Original Quantity
Number of reorders

3.10.1.1 Spliced Packaging Unit
Figure 3 - 74: Spliced Packaging Unit dialog
Access right required for this dialog: SplicedLot.aspx

This dialog displays the content and key data for the previously selected packaging unit chain.
Field description
Packaging Unit
Packaging Unit
Packaging unit ID of the packaging unit chain.
Part Number
Total Quantity
Total number of components in the packaging unit chain.
Locked
Shows whether the material was locked.
Lock Reason
Spliced Packaging Unit table
Position
Order of the packaging unit in the packaging unit chain.
The packaging unit that can be identified is at position 1.
The spliced packaging units are in the subsequent positions.
Packaging Unit
Part number of the individual packaging units.
Quantity

Greyzone
Part Number
Locked
Lock Reason
3.10.2 Material by Manufacturer
Figure 3 - 75: Material by Manufacturer dialog
Access right required for this dialog: SupplierMaterialDefinition.aspx

This dialog displays the data related to the manufacturers entered in the system. Depending on the
manufacturer you select, the table below displays an overview of the material definitions that are
assigned to the manufacturer.
To find certain manufacturers more easily, you can use a filter for the search, which reduces the number
of manufacturers displayed.
Manufacturer table
Name
Manufacturer name that is managed in the system.


Barcode Type
This table displays all material definitions that are assigned to the manufacturer selected in the table
above.
Manufacturer MSD Level
MSD level specified by the manufacturer for the material.
Size
Size specified by the manufacturer for the reel on which the material is delivered.
Part Number
Internal material ID used for technical purposes.
Article Number
The entry is usually the same as the part number, but you can also specify an alias.
Description
Material Type
Type of material.
Raw Material
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Final end product.
Material Class
Class of the material.
Component
Panel
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Final end product.
MSD Level
has been opened.

Approval Required
If this option is enabled, approval is required for packaging units of this material.
Obsolete
Shows whether the material can still be processed or whether it is already obsolete. If the material is
obsolete, it can no longer be accepted in the Identify Incoming Material dialog.
Inventory Date
Date on which a perpetual inventory was performed for this material definition.
3.10.3 Packaging Unit Log
Figure 3 - 76: Packaging Unit Log dialog
Access right required for this dialog: LotLog.aspx

Use this dialog to track and review the history of a packaging unit. Every change to a packaging unit is
logged by an entry in this table.
To find certain packaging units more easily, you can use a filter for the search, which reduces the
number of entries displayed.
Packaging Unit Log table
This table displays all the entries related to the packaging unit history.
ID
Sequential number of the archive entry.
Packaging Unit
Part Number

Time Stamp
Time stamp indicating when the history entry was created.
Posting Key
Key used for posting a change to the packaging unit.
Posting Reason
Reason for the change to the packaging unit.
Event Parameter
Contains additional information on the posted event.
User Name
Name of the user who created the packaging unit.
State
Previous State
Previous state of the packaging unit.
Quantity
Previous Quantity
Previous number of components in the packaging unit.
Name
Location of the packaging unit at the time of the history entry.
Previous Location ID
Previous location of the packaging unit.
Setup Location
Position of the packaging unit on the setup table/track.
Previous Setup Location
Previous position on the setup table, if this has changed.
Order Cluster
ID of the order cluster for which the packaging unit is reserved.
Incoming Batch ID
SAP Ordernumber, SAP Ordernumber Position, Transport Job, Transport Job Position
MSD Remaining Time
Planned Setup
Setup for which the packaging unit is to be used.
Previous Planned Setup
The packaging unit was assigned to another setup.
Displays the previous planned setup for which the packaging was to be used previously.

3.10.4 Packaging Unit History
Figure 3 - 77: Packaging Unit History dialog
Access right required for this dialog: TraceabilityForward.aspx

This dialog displays an overview of all packaging units that have ever existed in your system. It even
shows packaging units that have been deleted in the system.
You see detailed information on the life cycle and development cycle of each packaging unit, where it
has been, and how it was used.
You can use the filter function to reduce the content displayed in the table to specific data.
Packaging Unit Log table
Packaging Unit
Original Quantity
Initial Quantity
Original number of components in the packaging unit when it was created in the Material Manager.
Size
Packaging unit size for storage bin assignment.
MSD Level
has been opened.
Production Date
Date on which the delivered material was produced.
Date Code

Expiry Date
Manufacturer
Name of the manufacturer. You can use the manufacturer name or code.
Manufacturer Quantity
Total number of all components contained in the packaging units belonging to the delivery.
Shipping Note
Part Number
Article Number
Material Type
Raw Material
Semi Finished Good
Finished Good
Final end product.
Material Class
Material classes are refinement levels of the material types.
RoHS Compliant
Incoming Batch ID
User Name
Scan String
Content (raw data) of the scanned 2D barcode with which the packaging unit was delivered.
MSD Open Date
For material with MSD Level only.
Supplier
Smart FEFO
(FEFO = First Expired First Out)

If this option is enabled, the Smart FEFO mechanism is applied in the Identify Incoming Material
dialog.
Creation Date
Customer 1, Customer 2, Customer 3, Customer 4, Customer 5
Brightness Class
Comment
Locked
Lock Reason

3.10.5 MSD Baking Oven
Figure 3 - 78: MSD Baking Oven dialog
This dialog first displays a table containing an overview of all packaging units currently in a baking oven.
The packaging units displayed are sorted according to the time remaining (column 1).
The Factory Layout on the left-hand side displays all baking ovens where packaging units are located.
By entering filter criteria, you can search for specific materials or packaging units.
The packaging units displayed in the table are reduced to the selected packaging units accordingly.
By selecting an oven in the Factory Layout, only the packaging units in the selected baking oven are
displayed in the table.
Field description
Filter
In this area you define the filter criteria according to which the warehouses are to be searched.
After entering a filter, only the locations containing material matching the filter criteria are displayed in
Plant Layout.
Filter For
Choose whether you want to search for a Part Number or Packaging Unit here.
Value
You can enter a search term here.
You can use the wildcard * in the filter term as a placeholder for any number of characters.
Buttons
Filter
Enables or refreshes the filter to the search term entered in the "Value" field.
Delete
Disables the filter and clears the filter term from the Value field.

Plant Layout
The tree structure displays an overview of the storage zones and storage units defined in the system.
Magnifying glass
To go directly to a location, you can enter a host ID or a location here. The associated identification
point is then activated immediately.
Material Detail for Selected Location
This table displays the material found at the selected oven.
Material Details table
Remaining
Length of time left for the packaging unit to remain in the oven.
Packaging Unit
Bake until
Time until which the packaging unit must remain in the oven.
Number of components in the respective packaging unit.
Handling Unit
This is displayed provided that the material is in an identifiable container or in a storage bin.
Part Number
Rebakes left
Baking Category
Monitored baking
The baking time is calculated by the system and the system checks compliance with this.
Non monitored baking
It is impossible for the system to calculate the baking time because data required for this, such as
the material thickness, is not available.
Or: The Baking behavior of the baking oven is set to Manual in the Factory Explorer OIB module
in the Central Settings under properties for the storage location in the MSD Baking area.
Use as dry rack
It is impossible to bake a packaging unit because the number of rebakes left = 0.
The baking oven can only be used as a dry rack for this packaging unit. The MSD time is paused
and the material is stored as MSD-Safe. However, it is impossible to reset the MSD time.

4 User interface of the Warehouse Monitor

This section describes the user interface of the Warehouse Monitor.
4.1 General information

This section provides a brief overview of how to install and start the Warehouse Monitor, as well as its
additional functions.
4.1.1 Installing the Warehouse Monitor

The Warehouse Monitor is a package that you can optionally install together with the Material Manager.
To install the Warehouse Monitor while installing the Material Manager, enable the Warehouse Monitor
option in the dialog shown above.
You can also install the Warehouse Monitor later.
For more information on installing the Warehouse Monitor, see the installation manual for the Material
Manager.

4.1.2 Starting the Warehouse Monitor

The Warehouse Monitor is a web-based application that is started in parallel to the Material Manager.
The following browsers are currently supported:
l Google Chrome version 81 or higher
l Mozilla Firefox version 68 or higher
l Microsoft Edge version 41 or higher
To start the Warehouse Monitor, proceed as follows:
1. Start your browser.
2. Enter the following string in the address line:
<computer name>/WarehouseMonitor/
Enter the server on which the Material Manager is installed in <computer name>.
4.1.3 Additional functions

Two symbols are displayed at the bottom of the Warehouse Monitor which you can use to access
additional Warehouse Monitor functions.
Click this symbol to open the dialog for configuring the Warehouse Monitor.
For a description of this dialog, see Configuring the Warehouse Monitor on page 253.
Click this symbol to display information about the current version of the Warehouse
Monitor.
For a description of this dialog, see About the Warehouse Monitor on page 254.

4.2 Overview of approved picking orders
This view displays an overview of the approved picking orders that are next due at the currently selected
supply storage zone.
Note
Click at the bottom of the screen to open a dialog in which you can select a different
supply storage zone and configure the display of the data shown in the Warehouse Monitor
(see Configuring the Warehouse Monitor on page 253).
The following types of lists are displayed in the overview:

l Material requirements lists (lists with a normal ID)
One or more pick lists are created by the Material Manager to process a material requirements
list.
l Lists with a Bond ID
These are orders that were created for setups, production schedules, or jobs.
An order may contain one or more material requirements lists.
l Lists with a Task ID
These lists have been transferred from the Order Manager to the Material Manager.
An order from the Order Manager may contain one or more material requirements lists.
Besides displaying the material requirements lists, information about the planned order
processing (date/time and planned duration) is also displayed.
Click Start to start processing a specific material requirements list immediately.
If a material requirements list has any missing parts, a corresponding message is displayed.

Field descriptions for material requirements lists

ID
Name of the material requirements list.
Type
List type (pick list, initial list, refill list, reorder list, pick exact list)
Target Location
State
Displays whether the material requirements list is waiting to be processed or is already being
processed.
Approved
In Processing
Pick lists
Number of pick lists created for the material requirements list and pick lists already processed.
Setup
Setup for which the packaging unit is to be used.
Station Name
Location
Positions
Number of positions on the list.
Start
Click this button to start processing the material requirements list immediately.
A corresponding message is displayed for confirmation purposes.

4.3 Configuring the Warehouse Monitor
Use this dialog to configure the display of the data shown in the Warehouse Monitor.
Settings
Language
Language used in the Warehouse Monitor.
German and English are available.
warehouse
Drop-down list containing all supply storage zones.
Select the supply storage zone whose picking orders are to be displayed in the Warehouse Monitor.
Shrink Location Paths
Enable/disable this option to control whether the target locations displayed in the Warehouse Monitor
are shortened or displayed in full length.
Show Start Button
Enable/disable this option to control whether the buttons for immediate processing of a material list
are displayed in the Warehouse Monitor or not.
Show pick lists by default
Enable/disable this option to control whether the pick lists created from a material requirements list
are displayed in the Warehouse Monitor or not.
Sort order of types

In this area, you can configure the sort order of the lists displayed in the Warehouse Monitor using drag
and drop.
Sort criteria used: Reorder, Pick list without material requirement list, Remaining types
The criteria at the top are displayed first.

Sorting of active columns of material requirement lists

In this area you enable/disable the inclusion of individual columns to determine the sort order within the
material requirements lists.
Inactive columns of material requirement lists

In this area you enable/disable material requirements list columns that are hidden by default (show or
hide again).
Sorting of active columns of pick lists

In this area you enable/disable the inclusion of individual columns to determine the sort order within the
pick lists.
You can change the sort order of the order lists using drag and drop.
Inactive columns of pick list

In this area you enable/disable pick list columns that are hidden by default (show or hide again).
Enable/disable options
To enable an option, slide the switch to the right.
To disable an option, slide the switch to the left. The switch is then grayed out.
Exit dialog
To save your settings and exit the dialog, click Close.
4.4 About the Warehouse Monitor
This dialog displays information about the Warehouse Monitor version currently installed.
Tap Close to exit the view.

5 User interface PDA

This section provides a description of the individual functions that are installed on the PDAs, which you
can use to enter, compare, and correct the data in the Material Manager while on site.
5.1 General information on operating the PDA

This section contains a description of the requirements and the general functions of the PDA user
interface.
5.1.1 Requirements
To use the PDA and operate the applications, the following requirements must be met.
l WLAN must be available.
l WORKS Material Manager PDA Server must be installed on a computer in the network and be
running as a service.
l The PDA must be connected to WORKS Material Manager PDA Server via WLAN.
l The Material Manager Application Server must be installed and running.
Checking WORKS Material Manager PDA Server

To check the WORKS Material Manager PDA Server service, proceed as follows:
1. Click Start on the computer on which WORKS Material Manager PDA Server is installed.
2. Enter Services in the input field of the start menu.
4. Click Component Services.

5. Click Services (local) in the structure tree on the left-hand side.

The list of services installed on the server is displayed.
6. Double-click WORKS Material Manager PDA Server.
A dialog appears displaying the service status.
7. Click Start to enable the service, if necessary.
Connecting a PDA to WORKS Material Manager PDA Server

For a description on how to establish a connection from a PDA to the server, see Connecting /
Disconnecting the PDA on page 258.

5.1.2 Main window

This section provides an overview of the basic layout of the user interface for the PDA application.
If required, the user interface can be customized by an ASMPT service technician.
1. Name of the server on which WORKS Material Manager PDA Server is installed and with which the
PDA is connected via WLAN.
2. Current time.
3. Hides the application on the PDA, but does not disconnect the PDA from the server.
4. Shows whether the PDA is currently connected to the WORKS Material Manager PDA Server
service or not.
PDA is connected.
PDA is NOT connected.

5. Area in which you can access or display the individual application functions.
6. Opens the context menu of the application.
7. Opens the virtual keyboard.
8. Starts context-sensitive functions (e.g. Back, Disconnect, Connect).
9. Area in which messages are displayed.

5.1.3 Connecting / Disconnecting the PDA

After starting the application, you need to connect the PDA to the computer on the network on which
WORKS Material Manager PDA Server is installed.
You can see whether the PDA is connected to the server at the top right of the application.
PDA is NOT connected.
PDA is connected.

Connecting to the server
Tap Connect to connect to the server.

If the connection cannot be established, check the connection data.
To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Tap Menu on the PDA.
2. Choose IP Configuration in the menu.

The IP Configuration dialog is displayed.

3. Enter the IP-Address of the server on which WORKS Material Manager PDA Server is installed
and running as a service.
Ask your system administrator for the IP address, if you do not know it.
4. Enter the Port Number.
By default, port 49044 is used for this connection.
5. Exit the dialog.
Tap OK to save your entries.
Tap Back to leave this dialog without saving your entries.
The main menu is displayed.

6. Tap Connect.
7. Check whether the status of the icon at the top right changes to Connected.
If a connection cannot be established, an error message is displayed in the message bar.
If the PDA still cannot connect to the server:
Check whether the WLAN is available.
Check whether the IP address entered in IP-Address is correct.
Check whether the port number entered in Port Number is correct.
Check whether WORKS Material Manager PDA Server is installed and running as a service (see
Requirements on page 255).
Check whether the firewall you are using allows communication with the PDA server (system
administrator).
Disconnecting from the server
Tap Disconnect to disconnect from the server.
5.1.4 Exiting PDA applications

To exit the PDA application and disconnect the WLAN from WORKS Material Manager PDA Server,
open the context menu, and choose Exit (see Context menu - Exit on page 268).

5.1.5 Context menu

The context menu contains the main general functions and can also be accessed at any time from the
other functions.
Tap Menu at the bottom right of the application to open the context menu.
The next sections contain a description of the individual menu items.

5.1.5.1 Context menu - About
This view displays information about the software installed on the PDA.
Tap Back to exit this view.
Client Version
Version of the application installed on the PDA.
Server Version
WORKS Material Manager PDA Server version that is running as a service on a computer in your
network.
Host Name
Name of the PDA.
Menu.xml-specific active
Shows whether the default user interface of the application has been customized or not.

5.1.5.2 Context menu - IP Configuration
Use this dialog to configure the connection data between the PDA and the computer on which the
WORKS Material Manager PDA Server service is installed. You need this connection in order to
access the Material Manager data via WLAN.
In some systems, the network goes into sleep mode as soon as it has not been used for a longer period
of time. This breaks the connection from the PDA to the server. To continue using the PDA the
connection to the server has to be re-established.
If you enable the Ping option, the PDA calls the server at regular intervals (every 30 seconds) to
maintain a constant and stable connection to the server.
Hostname
If a connection to the PDA server exists, the name of the computer on which the WORKS Material
Manager PDA Server service is installed is displayed here.
1. Enter the IP-Address of the server on which WORKS Material Manager PDA Server is installed
and running as a service.
Ask your system administrator for the IP address, if you do not know it.
2. Enter the Port Number.
By default, port 49044 is used for this connection.
3. Enable the Ping option, if necessary.
4. Tap OK to save your entries.
5. Tap Back to exit this dialog.

5.1.5.3 Context menu - Message List
This dialog shows an overview of the messages relating to the steps carried out most recently.
Using this list, you can find out which steps have already been processed.
If you are sure that you no longer need all the messages displayed, tap Clear All. All the messages
displayed are permanently deleted.
5.1.5.4 Context menu - Error Log
Use this dialog to view the history of the last error messages that were output on the PDA.

To view the complete text and time stamp of the error message, you can double-tap a message to open
the detailed view.
If you are sure that you no longer need all the error messages displayed, tap Clear All. All the error
messages displayed are permanently deleted.
Tap Back to exit this dialog.
Detailed view
The detailed view displays the status and time stamp of the error message, as well as a description
containing the complete error message text.
Tap Back to exit this dialog.

5.1.5.5 Context menu - Help
This dialog contains the corresponding context-sensitive help text for the current PDA application.
Tap Back or OK to exit this dialog.
5.1.5.6 Context menu - Home
Choose this menu item to close the current function without saving any changes and go directly to the
home page within the PDA application.

5.1.5.7 Context menu - Exit
Choose this menu item to close the PDA application.

The WLAN connection to the WORKS Material Manager PDA Server service is disconnected.
5.2 Material Receipt dialog

Use this dialog to book a packaging unit into a specific storage bin in a storage zone.
Once you have entered the packaging unit data, the Material Manager searches for a suitable storage
bin for storing the packaging unit. When searching for a storage bin, the system takes into account the
packaging size, the exposure time of the packaging unit once opened, if applicable, as well as the
currently configured storage strategy.

1. In Warehouse, choose the storage zone in which you want to store the packaging unit.
A suitable storage bin is determined and displayed, if found.
3. Place the packaging unit in the storage bin displayed.
If no storage bin is displayed, place the packaging unit in a suitable storage bin in the storage zone
displayed.

5.3 Picklist Processing dialog

Use this dialog to select a material requirements list and start the picking process. The system creates
pick lists in the background. These list the individual material items that are to be picked. The PDA
guides you through the warehouses (storage zones). For each warehouse, you work your way through
the individual entries in the pick list, remove the packaging units displayed on the PDA, and then bring
these to the storage unit defined as the PickingPlace within the storage zone. If picking is successful, the
picked packaging unit is moved from the storage location to this storage unit.
When picking for a setup, the target item (format: Track|Tower|Level|Storage Bin) for the packaging unit
is displayed in addition to the packaging unit data under Setup item.
You can choose Skip to skip any packaging units in the list that you cannot find. In this case, attempts
are made to find this packaging unit later on in a different storage unit.
Tap Interrupt to temporarily pause processing of a storage unit and resume processing at a later point in
time.
If you have finished processing a pick list for the storage unit, tap Complete Storage Unit and then
select the next storage unit to continue with the picking process.
Note
When you have completed a storage unit, you can no longer pick from this unit for the current
pick list, even if not all packaging units have been picked.
Pick list processing is finished when you have processed all the storage units defined for this pick list
completely.
1. Select the storage zone in Warehouse in which you want to begin processing the pick lists.
2. Tap OK.

3. Select the lists that you want to process.

Only material requirements lists that match the selection you just made are offered for selection
under Requirement List.
Only Own Lists
Only lists that you have created are displayed.
Lists of all PDA Users
All lists created with a PDA are displayed.
Setup Lists
Only setup lists imported from SIPLACE Pro are displayed.
Delete
Opens a dialog in which you select a list, which you can then delete.
Requirement List
Here, choose the refinement level of the material requirements lists displayed in the drop-down list.
When you press the button, the next refinement level is selected in each case.
Any
All of the material requirements lists that match the setting you chose above are displayed.
Initial
Only the material requirements lists used for an initial setup are displayed here.
Refill
Only the material requirements lists used to refill machines are displayed here.
Reorder
Only reordering lists are displayed.
MSD
Only MSD material requirements lists are displayed.

4. Choose the refinement level of the material requirements lists displayed in the drop-down list under
Requirement List.
5. In the drop-down list under Requirement List, select the material requirements list that you want to
process.
6. In Target Loc., select the Storage Unit in which you want to start picking.
7. Tap Start Picking.
Subsequent processing depends on the storage location where the materials are stored.
l Picking from a storage zone (e.g. rack)
l Picking from a tower
l Picking from an automatic storage system (e.g. Kardex or Hänel)
Picking from a storage zone (e.g. rack)

The next dialog displays information on the first packaging unit in the pick list. Besides the packaging
unit ID, you also see where the packaging unit is located.

7. Remove the packaging unit from the storage unit displayed on the PDA.
When picking for a setup, the target item (format: Track|Tower|Level|Storage Bin) for the packaging
unit is displayed in addition to the packaging unit data under Setup item.
By scanning the barcode you confirm that you have removed the correct packaging unit.
If the packaging unit displayed on the PDA is NOT in the storage unit displayed, tap Skip. In this
case, this material is transferred to another pick list and attempts are made to find it in another
storage unit.
If you have processed all entries for the selected storage unit, select the next storage unit in Target
Loc. (step 5) and resume pick list processing.
components:
10. Confirm the display on the PDA. The Material Manager reduces the packaging unit quantity by the
number of components removed.
11. Return the packaging unit to the location from which you removed it.
Picking from a tower

After you have started picking (see step 6 above), the tower starts to process the pick list sequentially
until it is completed. Once the pick list has been processed completely, this is indicated and you can then
proceed with the selection of the next pick list (see step 3 above).
time.

During processing of the pick list, the PDA shows the list of packaging units that have not yet been
picked.
is displayed in addition to the packaging unit data under Setup item.
If you want to finish processing of the pick list before the end of the list is reached, tap Complete Storage
Unit.
Note
When you have completed a storage unit, you can no longer pick from this unit for the current
pick list, even if not all packaging units have been picked.
Picking from an automatic storage system (e.g. Kardex or Hänel)

After you have started picking (see step 6 above), the automatic storage system starts to process the
pick list and delivers the first packaging unit.
time.

7. Scan the packaging unit that the storage system has delivered.
After you have scanned this packaging unit, information about the packaging unit is displayed on the
PDA. When picking for a setup, the target item (format: Track|Tower|Level|Storage Bin) for the
packaging unit is displayed in addition to the packaging unit data under Setup item.
Scanning acts as a trigger for the storage system to deliver the next packaging unit in each case until the
entire pick list has been processed.

When the pick list has been completely processed, the application automatically brings you back to step
3.
The information field displays the setup item (target location) for the most recently picked packaging unit.
You can now select the next pick list to continue with the picking of materials.
5.4 Manual Storage dialog

Use this dialog to store a packaging unit in a specific storage bin in a specific high-bay storage zone.
1. In Warehouse, choose the storage zone in which you want to store the packaging unit.


5.4.1 Error messages when placing in storage

If it is not possible to place a packaging unit in storage because it still has the setup status, this may be
due to one of the following reasons.
l The packaging unit was set up manually and the status of the packaging unit was not reset from
setup to available.
Scenario 1:
The following message is displayed on the PDA:
Reason:
The packaging unit was withdrawn manually and the status of the packaging unit was not reset from
setup to available.
Solution:
To store this material in a storage location, you can make settings in the Factory Explorer OIB module
so that the status of the packaging units is automatically reset from setup to available separately for
each line.
For a detailed description of the settings, see Automatically tear down when charging lots on page 50.
Resetting the status manually:
1. Using Material Management in the Material Manager, switch to the Packaging Unit dialog.
2. Select the packaging unit in question in the table.
3. Click Edit Packaging Unit.
4. Change the status of the packaging unit from setup back to available.
5. Click OK.

Scenario 2:
The following message is displayed on the PDA:
Reason:
The message from the Setup Center to the effect that a material was torn down was not received in the
Material Manager.
The connection to / from the Setup Center has been broken.
Solution:
Wait a short time and try again.
If this message is displayed repeatedly, check whether the connection between the Material Manager
and the Setup Center has been interrupted. For a description of this, see Troubleshooting on page 358
in:
l Messages from the Setup Center are no longer received in the Material Manager
l Messages from the Material Manager are no longer received in the Setup Center

5.5 Material Reorder dialog

Use this dialog to request one or more additional packaging units for a production line.
You can then proceed directly to store the required material, if required.
1. In Location, select the production line for which you want to request the material.
2. Scan the part number or packaging unit ID of the required material or the track ruler of the reel for
which you need to reorder materials, or enter these using the keyboard.
If you have scanned the packaging unit ID, the corresponding part number is determined
automatically and displayed on the PDA.

3. Tap Approve List and Process.

A pick list is created, which you can work through immediately in the next dialog.
You can find this pick list in Only Own Lists in the Pick list Processing dialog. The name of the list is
made up of the name of the production line and the current sequential number.
Example: Line1-002402
4. Complete the process.

Tap Start Picking to pick the requested material immediately. For a description of this process,
see Picklist Processing dialog on page 270.
Tap Back to request more packaging units.

5.6 Park Table dialog

In this dialog you place a table with packaging units set up in a storage zone or a parking position
(storage bin).
Note
Requirements
Tables can only be parked in a storage unit that is defined as a Parking Place type in the
Factory Explorer OIB module.
If a table is to be parked in a parking position within a storage unit of the Parking Place type,
the parking position must be defined as a storage bin in the storage unit.
Enable the Automatically book on feeder removed option if the packaging units set up on the
table are to be booked to the storage unit automatically.
Enable the Automatically book on teardown option if packaging units are to be booked to the
storage unit after tear down.
Enable the Material Picking Allowed option if the packaging units set up on the parked table
are also to be available for other production runs when creating pick lists.
Note
l If one of the options for "Automatically book" is enabled, the other two
options should not be enabled.
l Within a storage zone, an "Automatically book" option may be enabled at a
maximum of one storage unit.

1. Place the set up table at a storage unit of the Parking Place type or in a parking position.
2. Scan the barcode of the table, or enter the table ID in Table using the keyboard.
3. Scan the barcode of the storage unit or storage bin, or enter the name of the storage unit or storage
bin (parking position) using the keyboard.
l The rules for MSD safety are observed.
l The state of the packaging unit does not change.
5.7 Process Packaging Unit List dialog

Use this dialog to select a packaging unit list and start the picking process.
The PDA guides you through the entries in the packaging unit list. Remove the packaging units
displayed on the PDA in turn and follow the instructions for them in the packaging unit list.
You can choose Skip to skip any packaging units in the list that you cannot find.
Press Interrupt to temporarily pause processing of a packaging unit list and resume processing at a later
point in time.
Packaging unit list processing is finished when you have completely processed all entries in the
packaging unit list.
1. Select the packaging unit list you want to process under List ID.
2. Press Process.
If you are sure that a list is no longer required, press Delete.
Picking from a storage zone (e.g. rack)

The next dialog displays information about the first packaging unit in the packaging unit list. Besides the
packaging unit ID, you also see where the packaging unit is located.

3. Remove the packaging unit from the storage unit displayed on the PDA.
When picking for a setup, the target item (format: Track|Tower|Level|Storage Bin) for the packaging
unit is displayed in addition to the packaging unit data under Setup item
By scanning the barcode you confirm that you have removed the correct packaging unit.
If the packaging unit displayed on the PDA is NOT in the storage unit displayed, tap Skip.
Picking from a tower

Once you have started picking (see step 2 above), the tower starts to process the packaging unit list
sequentially until it is completed. Once the packaging unit list has been processed completely, this is
indicated and you can then proceed with selection of the next packaging unit list (see step 1 above).
Press Interrupt to temporarily pause processing of a storage unit and resume processing at a later point
in time.

During processing of the packaging unit list, the PDA shows the list of packaging units that have not yet
been picked.
is displayed in addition to the packaging unit data under Setup item
If you want to finish processing of the packaging unit list before the end of the list is reached, press
Complete Storage Unit.
Picking from an automatic storage system (e.g. Kardex or Hänel)

Once you have started picking (see step 2 above), the automatic storage system starts to process the
packaging unit list and delivers the first packaging unit.
Press Interrupt to temporarily pause processing of a storage unit and resume processing at a later point
in time.
3. Scan the packaging unit that the storage system has delivered.

After you have scanned this packaging unit, information about the packaging unit is displayed on the
PDA. When picking for a setup, the target item (format: Track|Tower|Level|Storage Bin) for the
packaging unit is displayed in addition to the packaging unit data under Setup item
Scanning acts as a trigger for the storage system to deliver the next packaging unit until the entire
packaging unit list has been processed.
When the packaging unit list has been completely processed, the application automatically brings you
back to step 1.
You can now select the next packaging unit list to continue with the picking of materials.
5.8 MSD folder

This folder contains functions for editing the MSD open times or remaining times of materials.
production according to the MSD level specified by the manufacturer. The opening time must therefore
be precisely logged.
unit).
l You can Reset the MSD open time for a packaging unit with a limited floor life under certain
l In order to extend the floor life of a packaging unit, it is possible to remove some or all of the moisture
from the packaging unit following a strictly defined process in a drying oven specially designed for
this purpose.

When the baking process has completely finished, you can reduce the MSD open time for a
packaging unit with limited floor life to a predefined value in the MSD Baking dialog.
MSD Start / Stop

Use this function to start or stop the MSD open time of a material.
MSD reset
Use this function to reset the remaining time of a material to its original value on delivery.
MSD Baking
With this function, you reset the MSD open time of a packaging unit with limited floor life to a
predefined value.
Note
General information on MSD
For general information on MSD, see MSD-Management on page 155.

5.8.1 MSD Start/Stop dialog

Use this dialog to start or stop the MSD open time of a material that has an MSD level.
1. Select the current location in which you want to store or use the packaging unit.
If you want to stop the MSD open time, select the special dry storage unit (e.g. nitrogen storage unit)
in which you want to place the packaging unit.
2. Select the action that you want to perform for this packaging unit.
l Select Start to start the MSD open time.
The MSD open time starts counting down as soon as you scan or enter the packaging unit ID.
l Select Stop to pause the MSD open time.
The MSD open time is stopped as soon as you scan or enter the packaging unit ID.

The function you select is executed.
4. Place the packaging unit in the location you selected.
5.8.2 MSD Reset dialog

Use this dialog to reset the MSD remaining time of a material to the original MSD open time set on
delivery, just as if the packaging had never been opened.
Scan the packaging unit barcode.

The MSD open time of the packaging unit is reset to the original value.

5.8.3 MSD Baking dialog

the manufacturer.
purpose.
When the drying process has completely finished, you can reset the MSD open time for a packaging unit
with limited floor life to a defined value in this dialog.
The times used for reducing the MSD open times for the respective MSD level can be defined and/or
adapted on page 1 of the Creating / Editing a material class (details) on page 197 dialog.
Requirements
The baking process cannot be confirmed unless the packaging unit has been booked into a storage unit
of type Baking (Drying Oven).
Scan the packaging unit barcode.

The MSD open time of the packaging unit is reduced to the value defined in the material classes (see
page 1 of Creating / Editing a material class (details) on page 197) corresponding to the MSD level.

5.9 Administration folder

This folder contains a collection of key functions for editing materials.
Withdraw Quantity
Use this function to document that you have removed a certain quantity of components from a
packaging unit.
Inventory Packaging Unit
Use this function to perform the practical part (stock taking) of an inventory.
Use this function to permanently delete the packaging unit.

5.9.1 Withdraw Quantity dialog

Use this dialog to document that you have removed a certain quantity of components from a packaging
unit.
The material ID of the packaging unit and the number of components contained in the packaging unit
are displayed.
2. Enter the number of components in Withdrawal that you want to remove from the packaging unit.
3. Select the posting key in Key to be used for posting the quantity correction.
Quantity Correction
The quantity entered for the packaging unit was incorrect and must be corrected.
Cost Center Consumption
Cost center for the billing of consumption for other purposes.
4. Enter the Reason for the quantity correction or the cost center to which the packaging unit is to be
posted.
5. Tap Confirm to post the entered change.
Tap Reset to discard your entries.
5.9.2 Packaging Unit Inventory dialog

Use this dialog to carry out the practical part (stock taking) of an end-of-period inventory configured in
You repeat this process successively for each of the locations configured in the inventory.
During the stock taking process, you count the exact number of components in a packaging unit and
compare this actual quantity with the value saved in the system. If both values are the same, tap
Confirm to confirm the saved value. If both values are different, tap Change to change the saved value.

1. Select the storage zone you want to edit in Location.

2. Scan the barcode of the location where the material can be found.
l If the material that you want to process is on a Table in the pre setup area, scan the table
barcode.
3. Tap Start Inventory.
Enter all materials that are in the selected location as described below.
The material ID of the packaging unit and the number of components saved in the system that should
be in the packaging unit are displayed.

5. Count the number of components that are actually in the packaging unit.
6. Enter the value you counted in the input field.
In the case of packaging unit chains, several input fields are available for entering the quantity.
If the value determined matches the saved value, the Confirm button is displayed.
If the two values do not match, the Change button is displayed.
7. Tap Confirm or Change to complete this process.
When you tap Change, the saved value is updated in the system.
5.9.3 Set empty and discard dialog

Use this dialog to delete the packaging unit permanently.
Scan the barcode of the packaging unit, or enter the packaging unit ID using the keyboard.
The packaging unit is marked as consumed in the system and then deleted.

5.10 Information folder

This folder contains a collection of key functions for gathering information on specific packaging units
and materials.
Packaging Unit
Use this function to display detailed information on a specific packaging unit.
Find Material
Use this function to search for a specific material and display where the material is available and in
what quantities, grouped by location.
Browse Material
Use this function to check where a specific material can be found within your plant.

5.10.1 Packaging Unit dialog

Use this dialog to display detailed information for a specific packaging unit.
Scan the barcode of the packaging unit, or enter the packaging unit ID using the keyboard.
Information related to the packaging unit ID entered is displayed.
5.10.2 Find Material dialog

Use this dialog to search for a specific material and display where the material is available and in what
quantities, grouped by location.
1. Scan the barcode of the material, or enter the material ID using the keyboard.

In Location, you can see a list containing all the locations where the material entered can be found.
2. Select the warehouse you want to view in Location.

All the packaging units found in the selected location for the material IDs searched are displayed in a
table on the PDA.
5.10.3 Browse Material dialog

Use this dialog to check where a specific material can be found within your plant.
You can select a specific location to restrict the search and reduce the number of results displayed.
The search results display all locations where the material or packaging unit you are searching for is
found.

1. To restrict the search, select a Location in which you want to search for the required material.
If you do not select a location, the system searches all locations defined within your plant.
2. Scan the barcode of the material, or enter the material ID using the keyboard.
All the packaging units found in the selected location for the material IDs searched are displayed in a
table on the PDA.

6 User interface for the "Material Manager" app

This section provides a description of the individual "Material Manager" Android app functions, which
you can use to enter, compare, and correct the data in the Material Manager while on site.
6.1 General information

This section contains a description of the requirements and the general functions of the Material
Manager app user interface.
6.1.1 Requirements
Allow app installation

To install apps from the WORKS Mobile Device Manager on your mobile device, you must allow apps
from sources other than Google Play.
Note
Depending on the Android version installed on your mobile device, the description in this
manual may differ slightly from what you see on your device.
On Android 6.0 mobile devices:

1. Go to Settings – Security.
2. Enable Unknown sources.
3. Confirm with OK.

6.1.2 Main window

This section provides an overview of the basic layout of the user interface for the Material Manager app.
1. Menu list
2. Title of the current function
3. Area in which you can access or display the
individual functions of the Material Manager
app.
4. Expandable status bar (messages)

6.1.3 Starting the "Material Manager" app
To start the Material Manager app, tap the icon on your mobile device desktop.
The Main Menu of the Material Manager app is displayed.
6.1.4 Menu list
The menu list opens in the main view when you tap the icon.
This menu contains administrative functions and settings for the user interface.
l Registration on page 301
l Version on page 302
l Logging on page 303
l Settings on page 304
l About on page 304
6.1.4.1 Registration
Note
Possible connection loss
This dialog is intended for ASMPT service technicians and administrators only.
Only change the IP address if you have the necessary authority to do so.
You can use this dialog to register your mobile device in the Mobile Device Manager, or to deregister
your device. This change is necessary if the Mobile Device Manager moves to a different server.
IP Address
Shows the IP address of the server on which the Material
Manager is installed.
Deregister
Tap this button to reset the configured IP address.
The Register button is displayed.
Register
When you tap this button, a dialog opens in which you
enter the IP address of the new server on which the
Material Manager is installed.

6.1.4.2 Version
This view displays information about the installed software and any possible updates.
If the software version of the Material Manager app currently installed is older than the minimum
required version, this dialog is displayed automatically.
Minimum required version

Shows the minimum requirements.
Latest version
Shows the latest (most recent) software version of the
Material Manager app installed on the Material Manager
server.
Installed version
Shows the software version of the Material Manager app
currently installed on the mobile device.
If the software version of the Material Manager app currently
installed on the mobile device is older than the one of the other
two versions, a button for installing the latest software version
is displayed.
Proceed in accordance with the following scenarios:
l The currently installed version of the software is older than
both other software versions.
The software must be updated in order to continue working
on the mobile device.
Tap the button.
l The currently installed version of the software is older than
the last version installed on the Material Manager server.
The software can be updated. However, this is not
necessary in order to continue working on the mobile
device.

6.1.4.3 Logging
Note
This dialog is intended for ASMPT service technicians and administrators only.
This dialog displays an overview of the latest error messages.

Tap a message to display the message details.
Tap this icon to send the current log file to the Mobile
Device Manager.
Tap this icon to open a dialog in which you can filter the
messages by different criteria.

6.1.4.4 Settings
You can use this dialog to configure the language in which the user interface of the Material Manager
app is to be displayed.
Device Name
Shows the name of the mobile device.
You can change the name in WORKS Studio in the Mobile
Device Manager OIB module.
Serial number
Shows the serial number of the mobile device.
Language
Here you configure the language in which the user
interface of the Material Manager app is to be displayed.
Minimal Log Level
(for ASMPT service technicians only)
Here you configure the level of detail of the messages
stored in the error log.
6.1.4.5 About
This view displays information about the software currently installed on the mobile device.

6.2 Main Menu

From this dialog, you can access the individual functions of the user interface for the Material Manager
app.
This menu contains the administrative functions of the user

interface.
For a general description of the structure, see Menu list on
page 301.
Storage
Use this function to store packaging units in defined
storage units. Two storage modes are available:
l Manual Storage
l Automatic Storage
Picking
Use this dialog to select a material requirements list or pick
list and start the picking process.
Reorder
Use this function to request one or more additional
packaging units for a production line.
Packaging Unit Management
A range of functions for editing packaging units are
available here.
l Start MSD count down
l Stop MSD count down
l Reset MSD count down
l Stop drying
l Withdraw Quantity
l Delete Packaging Unit
Inventory
Use this function to carry out the practical part (stock
taking) of an end-of-period inventory configured in the
Material Manager.
Find Material
Use this function to search for a specific material and
display where the material is available and in what
quantities, grouped by storage unit.

6.2.1 Storage
Use this function to store packaging units in defined storage units. Two storage modes are available:
l Manual storage (default setting, see Manual Storage on page 307).
l Automatic storage (see Automatic Storage on page 308).
Tap Current Mode to select the required storage mode.

6.2.1.1 Manual Storage

Use this dialog to store a packaging unit in a storage unit manually.
1. Switch to Manual Storage mode, if this is not already

selected.
2. Check whether the storage bin size is the same size as the
packaging unit or larger.
3. Scan the barcode of the packaging unit, or enter the
packaging unit ID using the keyboard in Packaging Unit /
Table.
4. Scan the barcode of the storage unit or storage bin, or
enter the storage bin ID using the keyboard in Storage bin.
The packaging unit is booked to the storage unit.
5. Place the packaging unit in the storage unit.

6.2.1.2 Automatic Storage

Use this dialog to select the storage zone and the storage unit contained in it where you want to store
several packaging units. You select the storage unit once and this then applies to all packaging units to
be stored until you select a new storage unit.
Tap Manual Storage to switch to a different storage mode.
1. Select the storage zone and the storage unit contained in it

where the packaging units are to be stored automatically.
The following dialog is displayed (see below).
The currently selected storage unit is displayed in Current

Mode.
packaging unit ID using the keyboard.
Packaging unit information is displayed in Packaging Unit
and a description of the storage bin in which the packaging
unit is stored.
The packaging unit is booked to the selected storage zone.
3. Place the packaging unit in the configured storage unit.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all packaging units that are to be
stored in this storage unit have been processed.
5. Tap Current Mode to select a different storage unit or to
switch the storage mode.

6.2.2 Picking
Use this dialog to select the pick list you want to process.
You can reduce the number of pick lists displayed using filter criteria.
Select the list that you want to pick, and start picking.
All currently available material requirements lists and pick lists

are displayed on your mobile device. The lists are grouped by
the following list types:
AL: Pick lists

GR: Initial lists
NF: Refill lists
NB: Reorder lists
You can filter the lists displayed by different criteria, if required.
To open the filter dialog, tap .

Filter dialog
Use this view to reduce the number of pick lists displayed
using the following filter criteria.
Source
Storage units from which packaging units are to be
removed.
Target
Storage units to which packaging units are to be delivered.
List type
All list types are selected by default.
Tap List type to open a dialog in which you can hide one or
more list types. See below for a description of this dialog.
MSD
Here you select lists with only MSD packaging units, no
MDS packaging units, or all packaging units.
Order number
You can enter an order number here.
Subsequently, only pick lists that refer to the specified
order number are displayed.
Sort order
You configure the order of the pick lists displayed here.
Default
The default sort order is:
1. Reorder lists
2. All other lists according to NSA sort order
3. Pick lists
Select list type
All list types are enabled by default; all switches are set to red.
To hide one or more list types, slide the relevant switch(es) to
the left. The respective switch is disabled and grayed out.
To save your selection, tap CLOSE.

Process pick list

The app displays the following from top to bottom:
l The storage unit at which the material is picked
l The pick list you are currently working on
l The packaging units that are on the pick list
Process the pick list as follows:

1. Remove the first packaging unit in the pick list from the
specified storage unit.
packaging unit ID using the keyboard.
The packaging unit is booked out of the storage unit and
booked to the storage unit defined as the PickingPlace in
the storage zone.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you have worked your way
through the entire pick list.
4. Once you have processed the entire pick list, the dialog
closes automatically.
However, if packaging units are still displayed on the
mobile device that are not at the storage unit, tap DONE to
exit the dialog. In this case, attempts are made to find this
packaging unit later on in a different storage unit.
Missing Components
If insufficient material is available at the storage unit to process
the pick list completely, a missing components list is
generated.
By tapping one icon or another, you decide whether you want
to discard this list or send it to the assigned supply storage
zone as a reorder list.
By tapping this icon, the missing components list displayed

is deleted.
R (reorder)
By tapping this icon, the missing components list displayed
is sent to the assigned supply storage zone as a reorder
list.

6.2.3 Reorder
Use this dialog to request one or more additional packaging units for a production line.
If required, you can configure this dialog so that after reordering material you directly proceed with
picking the required material (see Reorder Settings on page 313).
To open the Reorder Settings dialog, click on .
1. Tap Line, and select the production line for which you want
to request the material.
2. Scan the part number or packaging unit ID of the required
material or the track ruler of the reel for which you need to
reorder materials, or enter these using the keyboard.
If you have scanned the packaging unit ID, the
corresponding part number is determined automatically
and displayed on the mobile device.
Repeat this process until you have prepared all required
packaging units.
3. Once all requests are prepared, tap .

6.2.3.1 Reorder Settings

Use this dialog to configure whether the dialog for picking the requested packaging units is to be
displayed on the mobile device or not after the material requirements lists has been approved.
To enable this option, slide the switch to the right. The switch is
then displayed red.
If this option is disabled, the switch is displayed on the left and
grayed out.

6.2.4 Packaging Unit Management

In this dialog, two procedures are available for editing packaging units:
l Info (individual processing)
First select a packaging unit and then the processing method to be performed for this individual
packaging unit.
l Series (series processing)
First select a processing method and then select the packaging units one by one to which processing
is to be applied.
Info - Individual processing
Tap Info.
Scan the barcode of the packaging unit that you want to
process, or enter the packaging unit ID using the keyboard.

The packaging unit and storage unit details for the packaging
unit are displayed.
Tap EDIT PACKAGING UNIT to edit the packaging unit.

The functions for editing the packaging unit are displayed.

Select one of the functions offered.
Start MSD count down
Starts the open time of the selected packaging unit.
Use this function if you open a sealed packaging unit or
remove a packaging unit from a baking oven or dry rack.
Stop MSD count down
Stops the open time of the selected packaging unit.
Use this function if you have sealed a packaging unit or
placed it in a baking oven or dry rack.
Reset MSD count down
Resets the open time of the selected packaging unit to a
defined value.
The times used for reducing the MSD open times for the
respective MSD level can be defined and/or adapted in the
Creating / Editing a material class (details) on page 197
dialog.
Use this function if the baking process for a packaging unit
has completely finished and you remove the packaging unit
from a baking oven or dry rack.
Stop drying
The MSD open time of the packaging unit is reduced by the
time that is set in the material classes for the MSD level of
the material.
Use this function if you remove a packaging unit from a
baking oven.
Withdraw Quantity
Use this function to document that a certain quantity of
components has been removed from a packaging unit.
To configure the required data, an input window opens
(see below).
Deletes the selected packaging unit.
Tap CANCEL to exit the selection.

Withdraw Quantity
Use this function to document that a certain quantity of
components has been removed from a packaging unit.
Quantity to consume
Enter the number of components removed here.
Reason
l When using the components for another production run,
enter the cost center here to be used for the billing of

consumption.
Then tap Cost Center.
l For a quantity correction, enter a note explaining the
reason for this here.
Then tap Quantity Correction.
Cancel
Closes this window without saving your entries.
Series - Series processing
Tap Working Mode to open the drop-down list for the

individual processing options.

The functions for editing the packaging unit are displayed.

Select one of the functions offered.
Start MSD count down
Starts the open time of the selected packaging unit.
Use this function if you open a sealed packaging unit or
remove a packaging unit from a baking oven or dry rack.
Stop MSD count down
Stops the open time of the selected packaging unit.
Use this function if you have sealed a packaging unit or
placed it in a baking oven or dry rack.
Reset MSD count down
Resets the open time of the selected packaging unit to a
defined value.
The times used for reducing the MSD open times for the
respective MSD level can be defined and/or adapted in the
Creating / Editing a material class (details) on page 197
dialog.
Use this function if the baking process for a packaging unit
has completely finished and you remove the packaging unit
from a baking oven or dry rack.
Stop drying
The MSD open time of the packaging unit is reduced by the
time that is set in the material classes for the MSD level of
the material.
Use this function if you remove a packaging unit from a
baking oven.
Deletes the selected packaging unit.
Tap CANCEL to exit the selection.

Scan the barcode of the packaging unit that you want to

process, or enter the packaging unit ID using the keyboard.
The function selected for this series is applied to the
packaging unit.
Example on the left: Delete Packaging Unit
Repeat this process for all other packaging units to which
you want to apply the selected function for this series.
Tap Info to go to info mode.

Tap Series to start a new series.

6.2.5 Inventory
Use this dialog to carry out the practical part (stock taking) of an end-of-period inventory configured in
For an end-of-period inventory, you compare the quantity stored in the system for each packaging unit
and the actual quantities in the warehouse for each packaging unit.
You repeat this process successively for each of the storage zones configured in the inventory.
1. Select the storage zone you want to edit by tapping

Location.
2. Scan the barcode of the location where the materials can
be found.
l If the material that you want to process is on a Table in
the pre-setup unit, scan the table barcode.

3. To start the inventory, tap the icon.
During the stock taking process, you count the exact number of
components in a packaging unit and compare this actual quantity
with the value saved in the system.
Scan the barcode of the packaging unit, or enter the packaging
unit ID using the keyboard.
l If the saved value and the actual value are the same,
confirm the saved value by tapping BOOK.
l If both values are different, update the saved value with the
actual value and tap BOOK to save the value.
To correct an entry, you can reset the contents of the input fields by
tapping RESET.

6.2.6 Find Material

Use this dialog to search for a specific material and display where the material is available and in what
quantities, grouped by location.
1. Scan the barcode of the material, packaging unit ID, or

table ID to be found, or enter the relevant ID using the
keyboard.
When searching for material

In Location, you can see a list containing all the storage zones
where the material entered can be found.
By tapping Location, a drop-down list of all locations is
displayed where the material you are searching for is located
(see below).
When searching for packaging units

When searching for packaging units, a list of all packaging
units with the same material ID as the material on the scanned
packaging unit is displayed as well as details of where to find
this packaging unit.
When searching for a table

When searching for a table, a list of the packaging units
located on the scanned table is displayed.
2. Select the storage zone you want to view.
All the packaging units found in the selected storage zone
for the material IDs searched are displayed in a table.


7 Changing the Material Manager configuration (OIB)

It is possible to change the configuration set for the Material Manager at a later date using dialogs.
From Material Manager Version 2.7, the Material Manager configuration is no longer carried out in the
ConfigurationHelper user interface. It is done exclusively using WORKS Studio in the Factory Explorer
OIB module.
1. To start WORKS Studio, double-click the WORKS Studio icon on your desktop or, from
2. Click Factory Explorer.


4. In the Application settings area, select the WORKS Material Manager application and then select
Global settings.
The main window for the Material Manager properties is displayed.
In the section in the center of the dialog, you will see different tabs, on which the properties of the
Material Manager can be edited across different thematic areas.
Changing properties
1. In the Properties area, select the tab on which you want to change the Material Manager properties.
The current property settings are displayed on the tab.
2. Change the properties to meet your requirements.
The changes take effect immediately and do not have to be explicitly saved.
Note
Help texts and tooltips
General information about the selected object and descriptions of the individual data fields
and options are displayed at the right-hand edge of the dialog.
You can also display this information as a tooltip by positioning the mouse pointer over a
displayed data field or option.


7.2 Common tab
Figure 7 - 1: Common tab - Changing common settings
Common Configuration
Edition
The installed version of the Material Manager is shown here.
WORKS Material Manager standard
The full version of the Material Manager is installed.
WORKS Material Manager basic
The basic version of the Material Manager is intended for users who are mainly interested in
operating the Material Tower. The basic version contains only those parts of the full version that
are necessary for operating the Material Tower. All other functions of the full version are
unavailable and are displayed differently or not at all in the user interface.
WORKS Material Manager for MSA
The MSA version of the Material Manager is intended for MSA customers who do not want to use
the Material Manager for warehouse management. The MSA version contains all functions
required for working with the Material Setup Assistant. The warehouse management functions of
the full version are unavailable and are not displayed in the user interface.
Use web services security
Enable this option if you want to run a web service with enabled web security.
Language
Language
Language in which the user interface and the Material Manager reports are to be displayed. This
user interface language can be changed later in the Material Manager (see Layout of the main
window on page 99).

Inventory
Setting for end of period or perpetual inventory.
Book uncounted packaging units to site
If you enable this option, all packaging units that were not found and, as a result, were not counted in
the inventory are booked to the Site and given the status Consumed.
Save uncounted packaging units to file
If this option is enabled, the packaging unit ID of the packaging units that were uncounted in the end
of period inventory will be stored in a file in the configured folder. This file is then saved to the path
entered under Inventory result path.
Inventory result path
Path for the inventory result file. The file cannot be written if no path is specified. Make sure that the
identifier under which the Application Server is running has write access to this folder.
...
You navigate to the required directory here in which the inventory result file is to be saved.
Export inventory results to web service
Enable this option to report inventory results to the B2MML web service.
For an end of period inventory, a message is sent after each packaging unit is entered, while for
perpetual inventory a message is sent when the inventory is complete.
Use alternative components
Enable this option if you want materials that have been defined as alternative components in
SIPLACE Pro to be considered as alternatives in addition to the original materials when creating
material requirements lists.

7.3 E-Mail Escalation tab
Figure 7 - 2: E-Mail Escalation tab - Changing the escalation e-mail settings
Use this tab to configure the e-mail addresses of recipients to whom automatically triggered escalation
e-mails are to be sent.
E-mail Configuration - OIB

Settings for escalation e-mails related to OIB configuration.
Send e-mail on error
If this option is enabled, an escalation e-mail is sent if communication with a SIPLACE system via
OIB has failed. This may happen, for example, if messages are not sent from the Material Manager to
the Setup Center or if messages cannot be processed by the Setup Center.
See below for descriptions of the other options.
E-mail Configuration - Additional Consumption

Settings for escalation e-mails related to additional consumption.
If this option is enabled, an escalation e-mail is sent if the additional consumption of a material
exceeds a certain percentage. This threshold is 10% by default.

E-mail Configuration - Material Reorder

Settings for escalation e-mails related to the reordering of material.
If this option is enabled, an escalation e-mail is sent if the reordering of a material has failed. This
may happen, for example, if an automatically triggered material reorder could not be transmitted or if
a supplier system reports back that the requested material cannot be delivered.
E-mail Configuration - Web Service
Settings for escalation e-mails related to the web service.
If this option is enabled, an escalation e-mail is sent if an error occurs when accessing the web
service via the B2MML interface.
Other options
You can configure the following data for each contact person:
Sender
E-mail address of the sender.
SMTP host
Host name of the SMTP server
SMTP port
Port number of the SMTP server.
Recipient
E-mail address of the recipient.

7.4 Incoming tab
Figure 7 - 3: Incoming tab - Changing the incoming material settings
Use this tab to configure the process for receiving packaging units in the Material Manager.
Incoming Module
You can transfer all the packaging unit data created in the Setup Center automatically to the Material
Manager. Any master data that may be required to do so is also created automatically.
Automatically import packaging units created in Setup Center
If you enable this option, Setup Center messages related to packaging unit data that has been
created are ignored.
If you disable this option, Setup Center messages related to packaging unit data that has been
created are processed in the Material Manager, in other words, packaging unit data and any master
data that may be required is created.

Layout of the “Identify Incoming Material” dialog
Custom
The layout of the Identify Incoming Material dialog was changed in an XML file according to
customer-specific requirements and is loaded from the file CustomTemplate.xml.
The XML files for defining the incoming material area are saved under:
*\ASMPT\WORKS Material
Manager\WebApplication\ASMPT\AS\SiMM\config\IdentifyIncomingMaterial.xml
(*\ASM\ASM Material
Manager\WebApplication\ASM\AS\SiMM\config\IdentifyIncomingMaterial.xml)
*\ASMPT\WORKS Material
Manager\WebApplication\ASMPT\AS\SiMM\config\IdentifyIncomingMaterialDetails.xml

(*\ASM\ASM Material
Manager\WebApplication\ASM\AS\SiMM\config\IdentifyIncomingMaterialDetails.xml)
Default + Supplier
The default incoming material area is extended to include supplier data.
Default
Default incoming material area
Store user name in packaging units

If this option is enabled, the name of the user who enters a packaging unit in the Material Manager is
saved along with the packaging unit data.
Allow storage location on label
If this option is enabled, the preferred storage location can be printed on the label.

Supplier quantity discrepancy notification

Always
A message is always displayed if the number of components does not match the planned
number.
Exceeding:
A message is only displayed if more components were received than planned.
Ignore
No message.
Label Configuration
Use standard label printer
If this option is enabled, the labels are sent to the printer in Zebra syntax. You should select this
setting if using the standard label printer GT-430GK.
If you do not select this option, the settings for other label printers are used. In this case, a detailed
discussion between ASMPT GmbH & Co. KG and the customer is needed.
Default printer path
The path and network name of the default label printer.
Time delay between labels (ms)
(For printer-specific templates only)
If the printer is unable to process the print queue in the correct sequence, you can set a time delay (in
milliseconds) here between the individual print jobs.
Label format
You configure the size of the labels that are stuck on the packaging unit here.
Possible sizes:
Default
Default size
Article Number and Packaging Unit Number
Small
Smaller labels 40 x 74 mm
Article Number and Packaging Unit Number

Large
Larger labels 51 x 76 mm
Article Number, Packaging Unit ID, Original Quantity and MSD Level
Custom
The same as the default size, but can also be adapted to special requirements using a TXT file.
The TXT file is saved under:
*\ASMPT\WORKS Material Manager\ApplicationServer\Config\Labels\Lot.txt
(*\ASM\ASM Material Manager\ApplicationServer\Config\Labels\Lot.txt)
Note
Creating custom labels
Instructions for creating custom labels can be found at:
<Material Manager Installation directory>\ASM Material Manager\ApplicationServer
\Config\Templates\Labels\readme.html

7.5 Database Maintenance tab
Figure 7 - 4: Database Maintenance tab - Database maintenance
Use this tab to configure the way in which consumed packaging units are handled in the database.
Database Maintenance
Delete consumed packaging units
If this option is enabled, a consumed packaging unit is deleted in the database after the period of
time configured in Duration has elapsed.
Minimum age (days) of deleted packaging units
Number of days after which a consumed packaging unit is deleted in the database.
Delete packaging unit history
If this option is enabled, the history of a consumed packaging unit is deleted in the database after the
period of time configured in Duration has elapsed.
Minimum age (days) of deleted history items
Number of days after which the history of a consumed packaging unit is deleted in the database.
Reorganize database indexes
If this option has been activated, the index entries will be reorganized to enable faster access.

7.6 Miscellaneous tab
Figure 7 - 5: Miscellaneous tab - Changing other settings
Use this tab to configure various parameters, such as the default report printer, synchronization with
WORKS Setup Center, the handling of unknown material definitions, and the printing of material
requirements lists.
Material Reorder
Note
Required software
This function requires software that must be provided by the customer.
Send reply to Setup Center

If this option is enabled, responses from the external storage system related to material requirements
are forwarded to the Setup Center.
Redirect single reorder request to Customer Web Service
If a group of materials is ordered from the Setup Center, a material requirements list is created and
then processed systematically in the Material Manager.
If only one material item is ordered from the Setup Center, you can use this option to specify how the
reordering should be processed.
If this option is activated, reordering is forwarded via the Customer Web Service to an external
system, which then processes this reorder.
If this option is not activated, a material requirements list is created for this material and then
systematically processed in the Material Manager.

Enable automatic reorder

For the reordering of materials, you can configure threshold values as of which materials are to be
automatically requested in a specific quantity from the supply storage zone.
You use this option to enable or disable automatic reordering.
Part Number Conversion

You use the following settings to synchronize the use of part numbers and article numbers for the further
processing of material data. This enables you to ensure that the Setup Center and SIPLACE Pro each
use the data transferred for the same purposes when the Material Manager and the external systems
communicate with each other.
Communication to the line level
Communication/data export from the Material Manager to the Setup Center.
Specify whether the Material Manager sends the part number or article number to the Setup Center
for further processing.
Part Number
Article Number
Communication from line level to Material Manager
Communication/data import from the Setup Center or SIPLACE Pro to the Material Manager.
Specify whether the Material Manager is to interpret the information sent for further processing from
the Setup Center or SIPLACE Pro as a part number or article number.
Part Number
Article Number
Create Material Definition on Packaging Unit Import

Create Material Definition on Packaging Unit Import
If this option is enabled, a material definition is created in the Material Manager for a packaging unit if
you receive notification from an external system, e.g., via the web service interface or WORKS Setup
Center, that a new material definition has been created and the part number supplied does not yet
exist in the Material Manager.
Report Configuration
Default printer path
The path and network name of the default report printer.

Material requirements list settings for the warehouse.
Use Royonic Warehouse System
If this option is enabled, warehouse management is not carried out by the Material Manager, but
by Royonics Warehouse instead.

Split Material List

If this option is enabled, only one reel per material and track is picked during the first run. The
additional material needed to replenish the stock is added to a new material requirements list.
Max packaging units per material
Defines the maximum number of reels of a material to be picked. If this number is not sufficient, an
additional material requirements list is created. This prevents excessive quantities of stored material
from being picked.
Check material requirement lists periodically
If this option is enabled, a periodic check is carried out to determine whether material requirements
lists have exceeded the interval set for them after the creation date. If this is the case, a
corresponding message is sent and the affected material requirements list and the associated pick
lists are deleted.
Interval passed after start to be reported
Here you define the service life of the material requirements lists and the pick lists associated with
them.
Maximum value: 24 hours
Format: hours:minutes:seconds
Note
When setting the interval, note that when you delete a material requirements list and the
pick lists associated with it, the reservation of the packaging units listed in it is also
canceled and this packaging unit is then available for other uses.
Material Requirement List - PDA

The operator can request a material reorder via PDA. If an employee other than this operator has to
provide the material from the warehouse, this other employee must be informed about this.
Print material requirement list
If this option is enabled, the associated material requirements list is printed when a material reorder
is requested (ideally on a printer near the warehouse).
Otherwise, the material requirements list is not printed, because the operator collects the requested
material himself, for example.
PDA
PDA port (requires restart)
Configured port for the connection between the PDA and the Material Manager.
The port entered in the Material Manager must match the port set on the PDA.
After the port has been changed, the PDA server service must be restarted.
IC Programming
To ensure the consistency of the components used for IC programming, the Material Manager checks
whether certain properties of the packaging units to be processed are the same.
By default, all data displayed in the list as well as the part numbers of the packaging units are checked.
For certain production requirements, however, it is possible to restrict the checking of common
properties.
Disable the properties of the packaging units that are not to be compared during the check.
Date Code


Manufacturer
Name of the manufacturer of the packaging unit.
The part number of the packaging units is always checked and cannot be configured.
7.7 External Connections tab
Figure 7 - 6: External Connections tab - Changing the external connections settings
Use this tab to configure the connections to other external systems.
Material Manager Customer Web Service

Active
If this option is enabled, the Material Manager is connected to the web service via the address
indicated below.
URL
Address via which the Material Manager is connected to a Customer Web Service.
If the Customer Web Service has been installed and is used with the Material Manager, the default
value must be retained.
Use user authentication
Activate this option if you want to use the authentication data listed in the following to log in to the
server on which the Customer Web Service is installed.
User Name
Name (user name) with which the user logs in to the system.

Password
Password for the user name.
SIPLACE Order Manager

Use SIPLACE Order Manager
Enable this option if the Material Manager is to be registered with the SIPLACE Order Manager (e.g.,
in order to use the Material Setup Assistant)
ASM Setup Center External Control

Use ASM Setup Center External Control
Enable this option if you want the Material Manager to connect to a higher-level external system via
the Setup Center External Control.
Use backward compatibility
Enable this option if you want to use the Material Manager MES interface, as was used in Version 2.4
and earlier.
7.8 Packaging Unit Management tab
Figure 7 - 7: Packaging Unit Management tab - Settings for processing locked packaging units
Packaging units can be assigned the Locked attribute for various reasons.
Use this tab to specify the type of processing for which the locked packaging units are to be approved.
Storage
When packaging units that are returned from production are placed back into storage, the packaging
unit may sometimes have the status SetUp and cannot be stored.
Examples of possible causes:
l The packaging unit was withdrawn manually and the status of packaging unit was not reset from
setup to available.

To store this material in a storage location, you can automatically reset the status of the packaging unit
from setup to available separately for each line.
Automatically tear down when charging lots
Disabled
An attempt to return a packaging unit with the setup status to storage triggers an error message.
The status of the packaging unit must be reset from setup to available in Material Management -
Packaging Units - Edit Packaging Units (see above).
Only in Setup Center
An attempt to return a packaging unit with the setup status causes the Material Manager to
attempt to tear down the packaging unit in the Setup Center. The status of the packaging unit is
automatically reset to available by the Setup Center.
In Setup Center and external systems
An attempt to return a packaging unit with the setup status causes the Material Manager to
attempt to tear down the packaging unit in the Setup Center and in external systems. The status
of the packaging unit is automatically reset to available by the Setup Center or external systems.
Allow storage of required packaging units
Specify here whether packaging units that were intended to be used by MSA or another system can
be stored.
Never
Packaging units that were intended to be used by MSA or another system cannot be stored.
These packaging units can only be stored in an intermediate storage location for refill material.
Non-assigned packaging units only
Packaging units that were intended to be used by MSA or another system can only be stored if
they have not yet been assigned to a current or planned setup.
Prevent storage of splice chains with different materials
If this option is enabled, splice chains containing different materials cannot be stored.
Only splice chains containing materials of the same type can be stored.
Include locked packaging units for ...

... Pick list creation
Is this option is enabled, locked packaging units may be used when creating pick lists.
... Material Receipt
Is this option is enabled, locked packaging units may be used for receiving packaging units.
MSD
MSD level threshold
Here, you can set the global threshold value, above which the MSD open time of materials is not to
be checked by the system.
The default value is MSD Level 1. If necessary, however, you can set a smaller MSD level.
Example:

If you set MSD level 2 here, the MSD open times for all materials with MSD level 1 and MSD level 2
will be ignored by the system.
Use this option if you are sure that the materials processed by you up to the MSD level set here will
ALWAYS be completely used up before the remaining MSD open time expires.
Level MSD Open Time

1 Unlimited, default value
2 1 year
2A 4 weeks
3 168 hours
4 72 hours
5 48 hours
5A 24 hours
6 Customer-specific value; can be configured
in the Setup Center and applies, on a
system-wide basis, to all packaging units
with MSD Level 6
MSD penalty time (minutes)

Here you set the number of minutes that will be deducted from the remaining MSD open time if an
MSD start was not initiated after a packaging unit was picked from a dry storage unit, or after the
airtight packaging was opened (see MSD-Management on page 155 or MSD Start/Stop dialog on
page 288).
The "penalty time" is booked automatically when the system detects the absence of the MSD start,
e.g., during line setup or storing.
MSD warning time (minutes)
Here you set the number of minutes for the remaining MSD open time. If the remaining time falls
below this value during storing, a warning message is displayed, indicating that the floor life of the
packaging unit will soon run out.
The user can then decide whether or not it is practical to place the packaging unit in storage.
Picking
Pick lists are sorted using a date entry.
The creation date of packaging units is used by default when creating pick lists. Alternatively, you can
also configure the production date or the expiry date of a packaging unit as the sort criteria for pick lists.
Creation Date
Production Date
If this date is not defined for a packaging unit, the creation date minus a configurable value is used.
The configurable value is displayed if you select this option.
Default value: Creation date minus 3 months
Expiry Date
If this date is not defined for a packaging unit, the creation date plus a configurable value is used.

The configurable value is displayed if you select this option.

Default value: Creation date plus 36 months
Automatic Printing of Expired Material Report

You can print a list of all expired packaging units automatically, if necessary. In this case, expired means
that the expiry date of the packaging unit has been exceeded or the MSD open time of the packaging
unit has elapsed. The entries remain in the list until the packaging unit is deleted manually or the expiry
date for the packaging unit is changed accordingly.
Enable automatic printing
If this option is enabled, the list of all expired packaging units is created and printed.
Report time
Specify the time when the list is to be printed here.
Use standard printer
Enable this option if the standard printer is to be used for printing the list.
Printer path
If you want to use a printer other than the default printer, specify the path and network name of this
printer here.
Days of week for automatic printing

Enable at least one weekday on which the list is to be created and printed.

7.9 MSD Baking tab
Figure 7 - 8: MSD Baking tab
Maximum number of bakings

In this area you define how frequently components may be baked. A distinction is made the various
material thicknesses and whether the components are BGA (Ball Grid Array) components > 17 x 17 mm
or not.
Material thickness less than or equal to 1.4 mm
Specifies how frequently components with a thickness < 1.4 mm may be baked.
Material thickness between 1.4mm (excluded) and 2.0mm (included)
Specifies how frequently components with a thickness > 1.4 mm up to and including 2 mm may be
baked.
Material thickness between 2.0mm (excluded) and 4.5mm (included)
Specifies how frequently components with a thickness > 2 mm up to and including 4.5 mm may be
baked.
Material thickness greater than 4.5mm
Specifies how frequently components with a thickness > 4.5 mm may be baked.
BGA
Specifies how frequently BGA components > 17 x 17 mm may be baked.
Custom
In this area you define the baking times of components. First, a distinction is made between the following
four oven temperatures:
125°C, 90°C, 40°C and a custom temperature. There is a separate table for each temperature in this
dialog in which the individual values can be checked and adjusted.

Within each table the entries are sorted by the material thickness of the elements. In the second column
you see the MSD levels defined for the different material thicknesses.
In the four columns on the right, you see the currently set times that the components have spend in the
oven in order to be reusable. The values in the four columns on the right can be edited and the current
configuration can be corrected.
Custom Baking Oven

In this area you see four tables (one for each oven temperature) with entries for the different
components and their baking times.
Thickness
MSD Level
has been opened.
Unit
Specifies whether the values entered in the four columns on the right are in hours or days.
>72h
Length of the baking time for components that have exceeded the MSD level by more than 72 hours.
<72h
Length of the baking time for components that have exceeded the MSD level by less than 72 hours.
>72h (BGA)
Length of the baking time for BGA components that have exceeded the MSD level by more than 72
hours.
<72h (BGA)
Length of the baking time for BGA components that have exceeded the MSD level by less than 72
hours.

7.10 Messages tab
Figure 7 - 9: Messages tab - Changing the message monitoring settings
Use this tab to configure the way in which the Material Manager reacts to certain messages from the
Setup Center. The messages from the Setup Center are classified by type, saved as a monitor record in
the Material Manager database, and then processed as configured in this dialog.
Setup Center (incoming)

This area displays the various types of messages that come from the Setup Center and are to be further
processed in a specific way.
Material moved
These messages are created if a packaging unit is moved in the Setup Center, e.g. during setup.
Packaging consumed
These messages are created if a packaging unit is consumed in the Setup Center.
Packaging quantity changed
These messages are created if the number of components within a packaging unit has changed.
Splice chain split
These messages are created if a packaging unit chain is split in the Setup Center.
Using the drop-down lists next to the message types, you can specify what is to happen with each of the
messages of a specific type.
Process (default)
The message is processed in the Material Manager, is assigned the status Processed, and stays
in the database.
If the message cannot be processed, it is assigned the status Failed, and stays in the database.
Delete
The message is NOT processed, and is deleted from the database.
Ignore
The message is NOT processed, is assigned the status Ignored, and stays in the database.

8 Appendix
8 Appendix
8.1 Data structures for the import

This section contains an overview of the dialogs in which you can import data. The data structures of the
individual import files and the content of the data fields in the import files are described for each dialog.
Note
The default values specified in the tables described in the next sections only apply for
creating new data.
To avoid system problems that may be caused by future updates, we recommend that you
enter values that correspond to your application scenarios instead of the specified default
values.
Note
Examples of the individual data structures required for the import are available on the
software CD for the WORKS Material Manager under:
<CD>\ProductDocumentation\ImportExamples
8.1.1 Material Definition dialog

Use this dialog to import material definitions as well as related material manufacturers and material
classes. A separate file is required for each of the three data structures.
Note
The individual data fields must be separated by a semicolon (;).
Material Definition table - Create New Material
Index Column name Data type Description

1 ID String -
2 Article Number String -
3 Material Type String The value must be one of the following
constants:
l Raw
l Semi Finished Good
l Finished Good
4 Material Class String The value must be one of the following
constants:
l Component
l Panel
l Semi Finished Good
l Finished Good

8 Appendix

5 Material Category String The value must match the name of a
material category that already exists in
the system.
Default value is "Default".
6 Unit Of Measurement String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
7 Description String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
8 Packaging Unit Management String If specified, the value must be one of the
(optional) following constants:
l 0 (no package management)
l 1 (package management, default
value)
9 MSD Level String The value must be one of the following
constants:
l 1 (unlimited, default value)
l 2 (1 year)
l 2A (4 weeks)
l 3 (168 hours)
l 4 (72 hours)
l 5 (48 hours)
l 5A (24 hours)
l Customer-specific value; can be
configured in the Setup Center and
applies, on a system-wide basis, to
all packaging units with MSD Level 6
Default value is empty.
10 Approval Required String If specified, the value must be one of the
l 0 (no approval required, default
value)
l 1 (approval required)
11 Brightness Class Required String If specified, the value must be one of the
l 0 (no brightness class required,
default value)
l 1 (brightness class required)
12 Smart FEFO Required String If specified, the value must be one of the
l 0 (no Smart FEFO required, default
value)
l 1 (Smart FEFO required)

8 Appendix

13 Obsolete String If specified, the value must be one of the
l 0 (normal usable material, default
value)
l 1 (The material is a "discontinued
model" and no packaging units can
be created in the Identify Incoming
Material dialog with this material
definition. The remaining stock, in
other words, all available packaging
units of this material, can still be
processed.)
14 Price String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
This value is further processed as a
floating point number.
Depending on the location (country) in
which the software is used, a decimal
point or decimal comma must be used as
a separator.
15 Material Reuse String If specified, the value must be one of the
l 0 (NO reuse of the material, default
value)
l 1 (Material permanently held in
reserve in the Active Feeder Pool)
This option is used by the Material Setup
Assistant only.
Material Manufacturer table - Create New Manufacturer dialog

1 Material ID String -
2 Manufacturer Name String The value must already exist in the
material definitions.
3 Manufacturer's Material ID String -
4 Manufacturer Storage Bin Size String The value must be the name of a storage
bin size.

8 Appendix

5 MSD Level String If specified, the value must be one of the
l 1 (unlimited, default value)
l 2 (1 year)
l 2A (4 weeks)
l 3 (168 hours)
l 4 (72 hours)
l 5 (48 hours)
l 5A (24 hours)
l Customer-specific value; can be
configured in the Setup Center and
applies, on a system-wide basis, to
all packaging units with MSD Level 6
Default value is empty.
6 Packaging Unit Quantity Int string Default value is empty string (0).
7 Comment String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
Material Class table - Add Material Class dialog

1 Material ID String The value must already exist in the
material definitions.
2 Material Classes ID String The value must already exist.
8.1.2 Material Category dialog
Note
Material Category table - Create New Category

1 Name String -
2 Calculated Scrap Float -
3 Additional Consumption Int -
4 Re-Storage Quantity Int -

8 Appendix
8.1.3 Material Class dialog
Note
Material Class table - Create New Material Class

1 Name String -
2 Group Name String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
3 Description String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
8.1.4 Manufacturerdialog
Note
Manufacturer table - Create Manufacturer

1 Name String -
2 Material Barcode Pattern String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
3 Quantity Barcode Pattern String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
4 Packaging Unit Barcode Pattern String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
5 Datecode Barcode Pattern String Default value is empty string.
(optional)
6 Barcode Type String Default value is empty string.
(optional)

8 Appendix
8.1.5 Warehouse dialog
Note

1 Storage Bin String -
2 Description String -
3 Part Number String If specified, the material ID must already
(optional) exist in the system.
4 Capacity Int Default value is 0.
5 Storage Bin Size String The value must be the name of a storage
bin size that already exists in the system.
6 Preferred Storage Location String The value must be one of the following
constants:
l 0 (no, default value)
l 1 (yes)
7 MSD Pause String The value must be one of the following
constants:
l 1 (yes)
8 Locked String If specified, the value must be one of the
l 1 (yes)

8 Appendix
8.1.6 Material Requirements list dialog - Import from File
Note
Note
Clear differentiation between packaging units/components
Note that details must only be entered for packaging units OR for components in each data
record. Otherwise, these details could contradict each other.

1 Number of Packaging Units Int If you are entering details of the number
of packaging units, you must enter "0"
under “Components”.
2 Number of Components Int If you are entering details of the number
of components, you must enter "0" under
“Packaging Units”.
3 Part Number string The material ID must already exist in the
system.
4 Track Int -
5 Tower Int -
6 Level Int -
7 Division Int -
8 Splice Chains Int If you want to prevent the picking of
splice chains, enter "0" here. Otherwise,
enter "1".
9 Optional Refill Reel Int If you want the first refill reel to be picked
immediately if a refill reel is required in
the initial list, enter "1" here. Otherwise,
enter "0".
8.1.7 Replenishment Thresholds dialog
Note

1 Part Number String If specified, the material ID must already
exist in the system.
2 Report Inventory Level Int -
3 Planned Inventory Int -
4 Minimum Deliver Quantity Int -

8 Appendix

5 Unit of Quantity String The value must be one of the following
constants:
l NumberOfComponents
(if the values previously specified
refer to components)
l NumberOfPackagingUnits
(if the values previously specified
refer to packaging units)
8.2 Data structures for the export

This section contains an overview of the dialogs in which you can export data. The data structures of the
individual export files and the content of the data fields in the export files are described for each dialog.
Note
The default values specified in the tables described in the next sections only apply to
creating new data.
To avoid system problems that may be caused by future updates, we recommend that you
enter values that correspond to your application scenarios instead of the specified default
values.
Note
The content of all files is coded in UTF-8 format without BOM (byte order mark).
8.2.1 Material reordering

This file format is used in the following situations:
l When reordering from the Material Requirement List dialog
l When reordering from the Material Forecast dialog
l When reordering from an external system (e.g. WORKS Setup Center)
l For manual reordering using PDA
l For automatic reordering (KANBAN)
When exporting, a CSV file is created, in which each line stands for a requested packaging unit.
The name of the file has the following structure: Order<UniqueID>.csv
UniqueID is an automatically generated number.
Example file name: Order0000138.csv
Note
The individual data fields are separated by a semicolon (;).
Strings are in quotation marks "" in the output file.

8 Appendix
Data structure
Index Column name Data Description Example

type
1 Part number String Internal number of the "1206"
material
2 Quantity Int Reorder amount 8998
l 0 = 1 packaging unit
l 1 = 1 component or 1
packaging unit
l > 1 = Number of
components ordered
3 Setup path String SIPLACE Pro Setup path, if "Line1\Setup1"
known.
Blank in example below
4 SMT Subline String SIPLACE Pro path for the "System\Line1"
SMT subline, if known
Otherwise the entry is blank
("").
5 TargetLocation String Path stored in Material "Enterprise:Munich:Production
Manager for where the Area:SMD1"
packaging unit is to be taken.
6 SourceLocation String Path stored in Material "Enterprise:Munich:Production
Manager for where the Area:Refill"
packaging unit is currently
located.
7 StorageBinID String ID of the storage unit to which "123"
the packaging unit is to be
charged, if known.
Otherwise the entry is blank
("").
8 StationName String Name of the SIPLACE Pro "Station1"
station, if known.
"SX2_MID00000007" in
Otherwise the entry is blank example below
("").
9 StationLocation String Number of the location on the "1"
machine
1 in example below
"0" = Number of the location
on the machine is not known
10 Track Int Number of the track on the 1
location
55 in example below
0 = Number of the track on the
location is not known or not
set
11 Tower Int Number of the tower 1
0 = Number of the tower is not 0 in example below
known or not set

8 Appendix
Index Column name Data Description Example

type
12 Level Int Number of the level in the 1
tower
0 in example below
0 = Number of the level in the
tower is not known or not set
13 Division Int Number of the division 1
This may also be a special 1 in example below
feeder module track, e.g. for a
2x8 mm X-Feeder.
0 = Number of the division is
not known or not set
Example output:
"1206";8998;"";"";"Enterprise:Munich:Production Area:SMD5";"Enterprise:Munich:Production
Area:Refill";"";"SX2_MID00000007";"1";55;0;0;1
8.2.2 Kardex
This file format is used for communication with Kardex systems.
When exporting, a CSV file is created.
The name of the file has the following structure: <UniqueID>_ORDER.KARDEX.csv
UniqueID is an automatically generated number.
Example file name: MRL0000028.txt_ORDER.KARDEX
Note
Strings are not in quotation marks "" in the output file.
Data structure
Index Column name Data type Description Example

1 Order String ID of the material requirements list SMD 5-001664
2 Lot ID String ID of the packaging unit to be charged or LotMAT00030
picked
3 Storage Bin Size String Name of the storage bin size Open
4 Action and Quantity String Action and number of packaging units -1
Supported values:
l +1 Store material (1 storing packaging
unit)
l -1 Pick material (1 picking packaging
unit)
l !1 Cancel material retrieval
5 Article Number String Internal material ID used for technical MAT00030
purposes, e.g. in SIPLACE Pro and Setup
Center.

8 Appendix
Example output:
SMD 5-001664;LotMAT00030;Open;-1;MAT00030
8.2.3 Haenel
This file format is used for communication with Haenel systems.
l When charging to the Haenel system, a material file and an order file are created.
l When picking from the Haenel system, only an order file is created.
Note
The individual data fields in the CSV file are separated by a semicolon (;).
Material file
The name of the file has the following structure: Material_<Packaging unit ID>.csv
Example file name: Material_MyLotMAT00030.csv
Data structure:

1 Lot ID String ID of the packaging unit to be charged or MyLotMAT00030
picked
2 Part Number String Internal number of the material MAT00030
4 0 String The value of this field is always "0".
Example output:
MyLotMAT00030;MAT00030;Open;0
Order file
The name of the file has the following structure: Order_<Packaging unit ID>.csv
Example file name: Order_SMD 5-001664.csv
Each order file contains a header with the following content:
Mrl ID Type 0 2
Data structure:

1 Mrl ID String For picking, the ID of the material SMD 5-001664
requirements list is displayed in this
column.
For charging, this column is blank.
2 Type String Indicates whether a material is being 0
charged or picked.
1 = Charging
0 = Picking
3 1 String The value in this field is always "1".

8 Appendix

4 Lot ID String ID of the packaging unit to be charged or MyLotMAT00030
picked
5 1 String The value in this field is always "1".
7 Empty
Example output:
Mrl ID Type 0 2
SMD 5-001664;0;;;0;;2
SMD 5-001664;0;1;MyLotMAT00030;1;Open;
8.2.4 Inventory reports

At the end of an inventory you can output a list of the uncounted packaging units in a file.
The prerequisite for creating the lists is that the Save uncounted lots to file option is enabled in the
Inventory area of the General tab under Central Settings in the FactoryExplorer OIB module in
WORKS Studio (see Common tab on page 325).
If this option is enabled, the packaging unit ID of the packaging units that were uncounted in the end of
period inventory will be stored in a file in the configured folder.
The content of the list is different depending on whether you are carrying out the inventory for a storage
zone or a site.
Note
The individual data fields in the CSV file are separated by a semicolon (;).
Inventory for a storage zone

At the end of an inventory you can output an overview of the processed packaging units in a file.
The name of the file has the following structure: FinishStorageZoneInventory_<InventoryID>_
<StorageZoneName>.csv
Example: FinishStorageZoneInventory_INV0001_ShopFloor.csv
This file contains a header and a line of data.
Data structure:

1 Number of Lots Int Number of packaging units 100
2 Number of Counted Lots Int Number of packaging units counted. 90
3 Number of Uncounted Lots Int Number of packaging units not counted. 10
Example output:
#Lots;#Counted;#Uncounted
100;90;10

8 Appendix
Inventory for a site

At the end of an inventory you can output a list of the uncounted packaging units in a file.
The name of the file has the following structure: FinishSiteInventoryFacts_<Time stamp>_<Site-
Name>.csv
Example: FinishSiteInventoryFacts_2018-09-25_10-15-56_Munich.csv
This file contains a column with a header.
Data structure:

1 Lot ID String ID of the uncounted packaging unit MyLotMAT00030
Example output:
Lot ID
MyLotMAT00030
8.2.5 Packaging unit data changes

An ASMPT service technician can configure the Customer Web Service to output data changes to
packaging units as text files in CSV format.
However, the file interface only exists for reasons of compatibility. Therefore, we recommend using OIB
Eventing in Material Manager as an alternative. Further information can be found in the OIB SDK
documentation.
Note
Data structure

1 Lot ID String ID of the packaging unit to be charged MyLotMAT00030
or picked
2 Part Number String Internal number of the material MAT00030
3 Quantity String Number of components in the 4563
packaging unit
4 CreateDate String Date on which the material was 30.12.17
entered in the system
Format dd.mm.yy
5 IncomingBatchID String Number of the batch to which this B00000099
packaging unit was assigned when it
Blank in the
was received, if known
example
6 SMT Subline String SIPLACE Pro path for the SMT System\Line1
subline, if known

8 Appendix

7 Description String Descriptive text for the packaging unit
If no description is available, the string
"" appears at this position.
8 Manufacturer String Manufacturer of the packaging unit
Example output:
MyLotMAT00030;MAT00030;4563;30.12.17;;System\Line1;;
8.3 Troubleshooting
Target audience: This section is intended for system administrators and specially trained service
technicians.
This section contains examples with information on how to respond appropriately to error situations and
rectify these.
States in the Setup Center and Material Manager do not match

Example:
Material cannot be received in the Material Manager because the packaging unit state is set to
SetUp even though the packaging unit has already been torn down in the Setup Center.
Action
Check whether the Setup Center adapter has been installed, correctly configured, and started at
all Setup Center work cells.
Reproduce the error, and go to Administration / Interface in the Material Manager to analyze the
messages displayed under Messages - OIB - Setup Center In in the tree structure.
Track with a sealed packaging unit is blocked for more than 2 minutes
Action
Check whether the Setup Center adapter has been installed, correctly configured, and started.
Go to Administration - Interface in the Material Manager and check whether a message is
displayed under Messages - OIB - Setup Center Out - Send MSD time fix in the tree structure
that was processed with errors. (State = Failed or Aborted)
If the return description is not helpful, call customer services.
Messages from the Setup Center are no longer received in the Material Manager
Action
Check the queue in the OIB with the endpoint "FactsOIBServices/SiplaceSetupCenter.svc".
l Go to Administration - Interface in the Material Manager and check whether a message is
displayed under Messages - OIB - Setup Center In in the tree structure whose state is Received
and Processing Counter > 1.
If the return description is not helpful, call customer services.
Messages from the Material Manager are no longer received in the Setup Center
Action

8 Appendix
Go to Administration - Interface in the Material Manager and check whether a message is

displayed under Messages - OIB - Setup Center Out - Send MSD time fix in the tree structure
whose state is Received and Processing Counter > 1.
Depending on the return description, you must then check the OIB Core, the Setup Center
adapter, or the Setup Center service.
A material requirements list that resulted from a Setup Center reorder is not approved
Example:
The material requirements list that resulted from a Setup Center reorder is not displayed on the
PDA or is not indicated as approved in the overview of material requirements lists in the Material
Manager.
Action
In Material Manager, go to Administration - Interface in the tree structure and check the
messages under Messages - OIB - Material Manager - Reorder.
Depending on the return description, you must then check the configuration of the Setup Center
adapter or call customer services.
Start WORKS Studio and check whether the Setup Center adapter - depending on how it is used -
is configured at the correct position in Factory Layout in the OIB Factory Explorer.
A reorder message from the Setup Center to a production line that is in offline mode blocks
processing of the subsequent messages
These messages can normally be ignored as they are processed as soon as the production line goes
back online. However, in this case processing of the subsequent messages is blocked and the
message has to be manually set to the status ignored.
Action
In Material Manager, under Administration - Interface, click on Add Setup Info in the tree
structure under Messages - Material Manager - MRL Management.
Open the Filter tab.
Click New Condition twice.
Under Active filter enter XML Message = * <Affected production line>* as the first condition.
Note that the name of the line has to be supplemented with * at the beginning and end, e.g. “*Line
5*”.
Example: XML Message = *Line 5*.
Under Active filter enter State = Received as the second condition.
Click Apply.
In the table that is displayed, select the message you want to ignore.
Click Edit.
Change the Status of the message to ignored.
Click OK.
Repeat this procedure for all other messages you want to ignore.
8.4 Web services

The Material Manager uses web services to communicate with external systems. For example, an
external system could be a main warehouse managed using SAP. Web services can also be used to
implement customer-specific functions.

8 Appendix
Note
Setting up an escalation e-mail
In OIB - Factory Explorer you can use Central Settings - Global Settings on the E-Mail
Escalation under E-Mail Configuration – Web Service to set the person to whom an
escalation e-mail is sent if an error occurs when calling the web service via the B2MML
interface (see section E-Mail Escalation tab on page 327).
8.5 Web Service Client

You can use the Web Service Client to import data created outside Material Manager (e.g. material,
packaging unit, or master data) into the Material Manager data stock.
Note
Setting up an escalation e-mail
In OIB - Factory Explorer you can use Central Settings - Global Settings on the E-Mail
Escalation under E-Mail Configuration – Web Service to set the person to whom an
escalation e-mail is sent if an error occurs when calling the web service via the B2MML
interface (see section E-Mail Escalation tab on page 327).
8.6 Setup Center External Control

The Setup Center External Control interface can be used to synchronize packaging unit information
between the Material Manager and a higher-level system.
8.7 Processing packaging unit chains

Packaging unit chains are created by the refill process in WORKS Setup Center.
WORKS Material Manager has the focus on the logistics view (tracking packaging units within the
factory) and WORKS Setup Center has the setup focus (setup and teardown at the production line or
setup area).
Therefore there are different requirements and also a different implementation within the two systems:
l WORKS Setup Center is mainly using one database table to handle packaging units and chains.
l WORKS Material Manager is using two database tables - one for the head packaging unit (this is the
one with the barcode which can be moved and stored in the factory) and another for the splices
which cannot be moved independently. In the different GUI dialogs both head lot and splice will be
displayed where appropriate.
Splicing packaging units ...
In case a packaging unit 'B' is spliced to the existing packaging unit 'A' then 'B' is the new head
packaging unit with the barcode. In WORKS Material Manager an entry for 'B' is created in the database
table for packaging units and 'A' will be deleted from this table and at the same transaction an entry for
'A' will be created in the splice table.
The head packaging unit has the quantity of the complete chain, because that is from the logistics point
of view the correct quantity needed for all calculations. If the information of the structure of the chain is
needed, it can be found both in the GUIs and using the Web Service Interface of WORKS Material
Manager.
Quantity and status between WORKS Setup Center and WORKS Material Manager...

8 Appendix
Both quantity and the status is synced between WORKS Setup Center and WORKS Material Manager.
In case 'A' is fully consumed (= reel empty), then 'A' will be deleted from the splice table.
If there are still components left on 'A', then only the quantity of A will be reduced in the splice table, but A
will not be deleted. The quantity of 'B' will be adjusted accordingly in both cases in the packaging unit
table because 'B' is the head packaging unit and therefore represents the logistics view of the complete
reel with the barcode. Basically, the packaging unit table always holds all information about the complete
reel with all attributes. And if the reel happens to be a splice chain (two ore more packaging units spliced
together) then the splice table holds the relevant information for all parts of the chain.
Splitting a packaging unit chain ...
If a packaging unit chain is split in WORKS Setup Center, the packaging unit chain is also splitted in
WORKS Material Manager. That means, if there was a chain 'B'-'A' before where 'B' was the head
packaging unit and 'A' was a splice at the pickup position, there was only an entry for 'B' in the packaging
unit table. After the split there are two entries again in the packaging unit table for 'B' and for 'A' and there
is no entry in the splice table (assuming there are no other splices for the packaging unit).
Changing the quantity of a packaging unit chain...
If the quantity of a packaging unit chain is changed in WORKS Material Manager, it depends on the use
cases, which part of the packaging unit chain will be changed. E.g. in the inventory dialog the user can
enter the correct quantity for all parts of the packaging unit chain. In other use cases only the complete
quantity can be provided. In this cases WORKS Material Manager has a business logic how to adjust the
quantities of the packaging unit chain. In any case the quantities in WORKS Material Manager and in
WORKS Setup Center are always the same after sync for all parts of the packaging unit chain.
8.8 Packaging unit data from the MES

WORKS Material Manager requests packaging unit data from the MES via the WORKS Setup Center
External Control interface in the following cases:
l A packaging unit is accessed (HTML dialogs IC Programming, Quality lock, Browse Material, MSD
Management, MSD Baking, Packaging Unit, Material Clearing, Material Receipt, Seal MSD-Material,
Split Packaging Unit).
l A packaging unit has finished baking (HTML / Mobile Client).
l A packaging unit has been picked (Mobile Client).
l If the MSD data is manipulated by the user (HTML / Mobile Client).
l If the current MSD data is displayed in the packaging unit info dialog (Mobile Client).
l A packaging unit is stored (Mobile Client).
l When packaging unit information is requested via the B2MML interface.
l When a packaging unit is counted during "End of period inventory".

Rückenleerseite
Rückentitel
ASMPT GmbH & Co. KG
Rupert-Mayer-Straße 44 | 81379 Munich | Germany
Edition: 11/2022 EN | All rights reserved | Item No.: 00900486-01 | Printed in Germany | © 2022 ASMPT smt.asmpt.com

00900486-01 OM WORKS Material Manager V2.20 R22-1 EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

00900486-01 OM WORKS Material Manager V2.20 R22-1 EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WORKS Material Manager

Rupert-Mayer-Straße 44 | 81379 Munich | Germany

ASMPT further expressly advises User and declares that:

Copyright © ASMPT Technical data subject to change

Item No.: 00900486-01 Printed by ASMPT

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 3

2.9.2 Picking material for a SIPLACE Pro setup 65

4 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

3.4 Material requirements 122

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 5

3.8.3 Sequence 219

6 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

5.8.2 MSD Reset dialog 289

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 7

8.1.6 Material Requirements list dialog - Import from File 351

8 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

1.1 Brief outline

Explicit / Implicit bookings

10 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

Figure 1 - 1: Process overview

l Forward material information to WORKS Setup Center.

l Find materials easily using the convenient browse feature.

open time has been exceeded (WORKS Setup Center).

with the aid of Setup Center.

l Create material requirements lists for the timely reordering of materials.

l Import packaging unit data, e.g. from ERP.

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 11

Printing barcode labels

1.3 Signs and symbols used

Conventions for the use of warning symbols

1.4 Differences in the user interface display

12 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

1.5 Online help

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 13

1.6 Overview of editions

14 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

07/2017 New functions / descriptions:

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 15

16 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

1.7 ASMPT SMT solutions on the World Wide Web

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 17

18 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

2.1 Plant Layout

Figure 2 - 1: Basic plant layout

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 19

Figure 2 - 2: Example of a possible plant layout

20 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

2.1.1 Creating a Factory Layout

Click Factory Explorer.

Click Factory Layout in the menu bar.

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 21

Adding or deleting objects in the Factory Layout

2.1.2 Editing the properties of the Factory Layout

Click Factory Explorer.

22 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

1. Click Central Settings in the menu bar.

Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022 23

2.1.2.1 Naming conventions for storage units

2.1.2.2 Instructions for creating storage zones

24 Operating Manual WORKS Material Manager V2.20 - 11/2022

2.1.2.3 Assigning a supply storage zone

2.1.3 Material Flow

Material flow for reorders from the line